1 /* Convert tree expression to rtl instructions, for GNU compiler.
2 Copyright (C) 1988, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000
3 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
5 This file is part of GNU CC.
7 GNU CC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
8 it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
9 the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
12 GNU CC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
13 but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
14 MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
15 GNU General Public License for more details.
17 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
18 along with GNU CC; see the file COPYING. If not, write to
19 the Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
20 Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */
31 #include "hard-reg-set.h"
34 #include "insn-flags.h"
35 #include "insn-codes.h"
36 #include "insn-config.h"
37 /* Include expr.h after insn-config.h so we get HAVE_conditional_move. */
41 #include "typeclass.h"
47 /* Decide whether a function's arguments should be processed
48 from first to last or from last to first.
50 They should if the stack and args grow in opposite directions, but
51 only if we have push insns. */
55 #if defined (STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD) != defined (ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD)
56 #define PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED /* If it's last to first */
61 #ifndef STACK_PUSH_CODE
62 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
63 #define STACK_PUSH_CODE PRE_DEC
65 #define STACK_PUSH_CODE PRE_INC
69 /* Assume that case vectors are not pc-relative. */
70 #ifndef CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
71 #define CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE 0
74 /* If this is nonzero, we do not bother generating VOLATILE
75 around volatile memory references, and we are willing to
76 output indirect addresses. If cse is to follow, we reject
77 indirect addresses so a useful potential cse is generated;
78 if it is used only once, instruction combination will produce
79 the same indirect address eventually. */
82 /* Nonzero to generate code for all the subroutines within an
83 expression before generating the upper levels of the expression.
84 Nowadays this is never zero. */
85 int do_preexpand_calls
= 1;
87 /* Don't check memory usage, since code is being emitted to check a memory
88 usage. Used when current_function_check_memory_usage is true, to avoid
89 infinite recursion. */
90 static int in_check_memory_usage
;
92 /* Chain of pending expressions for PLACEHOLDER_EXPR to replace. */
93 static tree placeholder_list
= 0;
95 /* This structure is used by move_by_pieces to describe the move to
108 int explicit_inc_from
;
116 /* This structure is used by clear_by_pieces to describe the clear to
119 struct clear_by_pieces
131 extern struct obstack permanent_obstack
;
133 static rtx get_push_address
PARAMS ((int));
135 static rtx enqueue_insn
PARAMS ((rtx
, rtx
));
136 static int move_by_pieces_ninsns
PARAMS ((unsigned int, unsigned int));
137 static void move_by_pieces_1
PARAMS ((rtx (*) (rtx
, ...), enum machine_mode
,
138 struct move_by_pieces
*));
139 static void clear_by_pieces
PARAMS ((rtx
, int, unsigned int));
140 static void clear_by_pieces_1
PARAMS ((rtx (*) (rtx
, ...),
142 struct clear_by_pieces
*));
143 static int is_zeros_p
PARAMS ((tree
));
144 static int mostly_zeros_p
PARAMS ((tree
));
145 static void store_constructor_field
PARAMS ((rtx
, int, int, enum machine_mode
,
146 tree
, tree
, unsigned int, int));
147 static void store_constructor
PARAMS ((tree
, rtx
, unsigned int, int, int));
148 static rtx store_field
PARAMS ((rtx
, int, int, enum machine_mode
,
149 tree
, enum machine_mode
, int,
150 unsigned int, int, int));
151 static enum memory_use_mode
152 get_memory_usage_from_modifier
PARAMS ((enum expand_modifier
));
153 static tree save_noncopied_parts
PARAMS ((tree
, tree
));
154 static tree init_noncopied_parts
PARAMS ((tree
, tree
));
155 static int safe_from_p
PARAMS ((rtx
, tree
, int));
156 static int fixed_type_p
PARAMS ((tree
));
157 static rtx var_rtx
PARAMS ((tree
));
158 static int readonly_fields_p
PARAMS ((tree
));
159 static rtx expand_expr_unaligned
PARAMS ((tree
, unsigned int *));
160 static rtx expand_increment
PARAMS ((tree
, int, int));
161 static void preexpand_calls
PARAMS ((tree
));
162 static void do_jump_by_parts_greater
PARAMS ((tree
, int, rtx
, rtx
));
163 static void do_jump_by_parts_equality
PARAMS ((tree
, rtx
, rtx
));
164 static void do_compare_and_jump
PARAMS ((tree
, enum rtx_code
, enum rtx_code
, rtx
, rtx
));
165 static rtx do_store_flag
PARAMS ((tree
, rtx
, enum machine_mode
, int));
167 /* Record for each mode whether we can move a register directly to or
168 from an object of that mode in memory. If we can't, we won't try
169 to use that mode directly when accessing a field of that mode. */
171 static char direct_load
[NUM_MACHINE_MODES
];
172 static char direct_store
[NUM_MACHINE_MODES
];
174 /* If a memory-to-memory move would take MOVE_RATIO or more simple
175 move-instruction sequences, we will do a movstr or libcall instead. */
178 #if defined (HAVE_movstrqi) || defined (HAVE_movstrhi) || defined (HAVE_movstrsi) || defined (HAVE_movstrdi) || defined (HAVE_movstrti)
181 /* If we are optimizing for space (-Os), cut down the default move ratio */
182 #define MOVE_RATIO (optimize_size ? 3 : 15)
186 /* This macro is used to determine whether move_by_pieces should be called
187 to perform a structure copy. */
188 #ifndef MOVE_BY_PIECES_P
189 #define MOVE_BY_PIECES_P(SIZE, ALIGN) (move_by_pieces_ninsns \
190 (SIZE, ALIGN) < MOVE_RATIO)
193 /* This array records the insn_code of insns to perform block moves. */
194 enum insn_code movstr_optab
[NUM_MACHINE_MODES
];
196 /* This array records the insn_code of insns to perform block clears. */
197 enum insn_code clrstr_optab
[NUM_MACHINE_MODES
];
199 /* SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS is non-zero if unaligned accesses are very slow. */
201 #ifndef SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS
202 #define SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS(MODE, ALIGN) STRICT_ALIGNMENT
205 /* This is run once per compilation to set up which modes can be used
206 directly in memory and to initialize the block move optab. */
212 enum machine_mode mode
;
219 /* Since we are on the permanent obstack, we must be sure we save this
220 spot AFTER we call start_sequence, since it will reuse the rtl it
222 free_point
= (char *) oballoc (0);
224 /* Try indexing by frame ptr and try by stack ptr.
225 It is known that on the Convex the stack ptr isn't a valid index.
226 With luck, one or the other is valid on any machine. */
227 mem
= gen_rtx_MEM (VOIDmode
, stack_pointer_rtx
);
228 mem1
= gen_rtx_MEM (VOIDmode
, frame_pointer_rtx
);
230 insn
= emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (0, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
));
231 pat
= PATTERN (insn
);
233 for (mode
= VOIDmode
; (int) mode
< NUM_MACHINE_MODES
;
234 mode
= (enum machine_mode
) ((int) mode
+ 1))
239 direct_load
[(int) mode
] = direct_store
[(int) mode
] = 0;
240 PUT_MODE (mem
, mode
);
241 PUT_MODE (mem1
, mode
);
243 /* See if there is some register that can be used in this mode and
244 directly loaded or stored from memory. */
246 if (mode
!= VOIDmode
&& mode
!= BLKmode
)
247 for (regno
= 0; regno
< FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
248 && (direct_load
[(int) mode
] == 0 || direct_store
[(int) mode
] == 0);
251 if (! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (regno
, mode
))
254 reg
= gen_rtx_REG (mode
, regno
);
257 SET_DEST (pat
) = reg
;
258 if (recog (pat
, insn
, &num_clobbers
) >= 0)
259 direct_load
[(int) mode
] = 1;
261 SET_SRC (pat
) = mem1
;
262 SET_DEST (pat
) = reg
;
263 if (recog (pat
, insn
, &num_clobbers
) >= 0)
264 direct_load
[(int) mode
] = 1;
267 SET_DEST (pat
) = mem
;
268 if (recog (pat
, insn
, &num_clobbers
) >= 0)
269 direct_store
[(int) mode
] = 1;
272 SET_DEST (pat
) = mem1
;
273 if (recog (pat
, insn
, &num_clobbers
) >= 0)
274 direct_store
[(int) mode
] = 1;
282 /* This is run at the start of compiling a function. */
287 cfun
->expr
= (struct expr_status
*) xmalloc (sizeof (struct expr_status
));
290 pending_stack_adjust
= 0;
291 arg_space_so_far
= 0;
292 inhibit_defer_pop
= 0;
294 apply_args_value
= 0;
300 struct expr_status
*p
;
305 ggc_mark_rtx (p
->x_saveregs_value
);
306 ggc_mark_rtx (p
->x_apply_args_value
);
307 ggc_mark_rtx (p
->x_forced_labels
);
318 /* Small sanity check that the queue is empty at the end of a function. */
320 finish_expr_for_function ()
326 /* Manage the queue of increment instructions to be output
327 for POSTINCREMENT_EXPR expressions, etc. */
329 /* Queue up to increment (or change) VAR later. BODY says how:
330 BODY should be the same thing you would pass to emit_insn
331 to increment right away. It will go to emit_insn later on.
333 The value is a QUEUED expression to be used in place of VAR
334 where you want to guarantee the pre-incrementation value of VAR. */
337 enqueue_insn (var
, body
)
340 pending_chain
= gen_rtx_QUEUED (GET_MODE (var
), var
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
,
341 body
, pending_chain
);
342 return pending_chain
;
345 /* Use protect_from_queue to convert a QUEUED expression
346 into something that you can put immediately into an instruction.
347 If the queued incrementation has not happened yet,
348 protect_from_queue returns the variable itself.
349 If the incrementation has happened, protect_from_queue returns a temp
350 that contains a copy of the old value of the variable.
352 Any time an rtx which might possibly be a QUEUED is to be put
353 into an instruction, it must be passed through protect_from_queue first.
354 QUEUED expressions are not meaningful in instructions.
356 Do not pass a value through protect_from_queue and then hold
357 on to it for a while before putting it in an instruction!
358 If the queue is flushed in between, incorrect code will result. */
361 protect_from_queue (x
, modify
)
365 register RTX_CODE code
= GET_CODE (x
);
367 #if 0 /* A QUEUED can hang around after the queue is forced out. */
368 /* Shortcut for most common case. */
369 if (pending_chain
== 0)
375 /* A special hack for read access to (MEM (QUEUED ...)) to facilitate
376 use of autoincrement. Make a copy of the contents of the memory
377 location rather than a copy of the address, but not if the value is
378 of mode BLKmode. Don't modify X in place since it might be
380 if (code
== MEM
&& GET_MODE (x
) != BLKmode
381 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == QUEUED
&& !modify
)
383 register rtx y
= XEXP (x
, 0);
384 register rtx
new = gen_rtx_MEM (GET_MODE (x
), QUEUED_VAR (y
));
386 RTX_UNCHANGING_P (new) = RTX_UNCHANGING_P (x
);
387 MEM_COPY_ATTRIBUTES (new, x
);
388 MEM_ALIAS_SET (new) = MEM_ALIAS_SET (x
);
392 register rtx temp
= gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (new));
393 emit_insn_before (gen_move_insn (temp
, new),
399 /* Otherwise, recursively protect the subexpressions of all
400 the kinds of rtx's that can contain a QUEUED. */
403 rtx tem
= protect_from_queue (XEXP (x
, 0), 0);
404 if (tem
!= XEXP (x
, 0))
410 else if (code
== PLUS
|| code
== MULT
)
412 rtx new0
= protect_from_queue (XEXP (x
, 0), 0);
413 rtx new1
= protect_from_queue (XEXP (x
, 1), 0);
414 if (new0
!= XEXP (x
, 0) || new1
!= XEXP (x
, 1))
423 /* If the increment has not happened, use the variable itself. */
424 if (QUEUED_INSN (x
) == 0)
425 return QUEUED_VAR (x
);
426 /* If the increment has happened and a pre-increment copy exists,
428 if (QUEUED_COPY (x
) != 0)
429 return QUEUED_COPY (x
);
430 /* The increment has happened but we haven't set up a pre-increment copy.
431 Set one up now, and use it. */
432 QUEUED_COPY (x
) = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (QUEUED_VAR (x
)));
433 emit_insn_before (gen_move_insn (QUEUED_COPY (x
), QUEUED_VAR (x
)),
435 return QUEUED_COPY (x
);
438 /* Return nonzero if X contains a QUEUED expression:
439 if it contains anything that will be altered by a queued increment.
440 We handle only combinations of MEM, PLUS, MINUS and MULT operators
441 since memory addresses generally contain only those. */
447 register enum rtx_code code
= GET_CODE (x
);
453 return queued_subexp_p (XEXP (x
, 0));
457 return (queued_subexp_p (XEXP (x
, 0))
458 || queued_subexp_p (XEXP (x
, 1)));
464 /* Perform all the pending incrementations. */
470 while ((p
= pending_chain
))
472 rtx body
= QUEUED_BODY (p
);
474 if (GET_CODE (body
) == SEQUENCE
)
476 QUEUED_INSN (p
) = XVECEXP (QUEUED_BODY (p
), 0, 0);
477 emit_insn (QUEUED_BODY (p
));
480 QUEUED_INSN (p
) = emit_insn (QUEUED_BODY (p
));
481 pending_chain
= QUEUED_NEXT (p
);
485 /* Copy data from FROM to TO, where the machine modes are not the same.
486 Both modes may be integer, or both may be floating.
487 UNSIGNEDP should be nonzero if FROM is an unsigned type.
488 This causes zero-extension instead of sign-extension. */
491 convert_move (to
, from
, unsignedp
)
492 register rtx to
, from
;
495 enum machine_mode to_mode
= GET_MODE (to
);
496 enum machine_mode from_mode
= GET_MODE (from
);
497 int to_real
= GET_MODE_CLASS (to_mode
) == MODE_FLOAT
;
498 int from_real
= GET_MODE_CLASS (from_mode
) == MODE_FLOAT
;
502 /* rtx code for making an equivalent value. */
503 enum rtx_code equiv_code
= (unsignedp
? ZERO_EXTEND
: SIGN_EXTEND
);
505 to
= protect_from_queue (to
, 1);
506 from
= protect_from_queue (from
, 0);
508 if (to_real
!= from_real
)
511 /* If FROM is a SUBREG that indicates that we have already done at least
512 the required extension, strip it. We don't handle such SUBREGs as
515 if (GET_CODE (from
) == SUBREG
&& SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (from
)
516 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (from
)))
517 >= GET_MODE_SIZE (to_mode
))
518 && SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (from
) == unsignedp
)
519 from
= gen_lowpart (to_mode
, from
), from_mode
= to_mode
;
521 if (GET_CODE (to
) == SUBREG
&& SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (to
))
524 if (to_mode
== from_mode
525 || (from_mode
== VOIDmode
&& CONSTANT_P (from
)))
527 emit_move_insn (to
, from
);
535 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode
) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode
))
537 /* Try converting directly if the insn is supported. */
538 if ((code
= can_extend_p (to_mode
, from_mode
, 0))
541 emit_unop_insn (code
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
546 #ifdef HAVE_trunchfqf2
547 if (HAVE_trunchfqf2
&& from_mode
== HFmode
&& to_mode
== QFmode
)
549 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunchfqf2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
553 #ifdef HAVE_trunctqfqf2
554 if (HAVE_trunctqfqf2
&& from_mode
== TQFmode
&& to_mode
== QFmode
)
556 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunctqfqf2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
560 #ifdef HAVE_truncsfqf2
561 if (HAVE_truncsfqf2
&& from_mode
== SFmode
&& to_mode
== QFmode
)
563 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncsfqf2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
567 #ifdef HAVE_truncdfqf2
568 if (HAVE_truncdfqf2
&& from_mode
== DFmode
&& to_mode
== QFmode
)
570 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncdfqf2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
574 #ifdef HAVE_truncxfqf2
575 if (HAVE_truncxfqf2
&& from_mode
== XFmode
&& to_mode
== QFmode
)
577 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncxfqf2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
581 #ifdef HAVE_trunctfqf2
582 if (HAVE_trunctfqf2
&& from_mode
== TFmode
&& to_mode
== QFmode
)
584 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunctfqf2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
589 #ifdef HAVE_trunctqfhf2
590 if (HAVE_trunctqfhf2
&& from_mode
== TQFmode
&& to_mode
== HFmode
)
592 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunctqfhf2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
596 #ifdef HAVE_truncsfhf2
597 if (HAVE_truncsfhf2
&& from_mode
== SFmode
&& to_mode
== HFmode
)
599 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncsfhf2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
603 #ifdef HAVE_truncdfhf2
604 if (HAVE_truncdfhf2
&& from_mode
== DFmode
&& to_mode
== HFmode
)
606 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncdfhf2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
610 #ifdef HAVE_truncxfhf2
611 if (HAVE_truncxfhf2
&& from_mode
== XFmode
&& to_mode
== HFmode
)
613 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncxfhf2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
617 #ifdef HAVE_trunctfhf2
618 if (HAVE_trunctfhf2
&& from_mode
== TFmode
&& to_mode
== HFmode
)
620 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunctfhf2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
625 #ifdef HAVE_truncsftqf2
626 if (HAVE_truncsftqf2
&& from_mode
== SFmode
&& to_mode
== TQFmode
)
628 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncsftqf2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
632 #ifdef HAVE_truncdftqf2
633 if (HAVE_truncdftqf2
&& from_mode
== DFmode
&& to_mode
== TQFmode
)
635 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncdftqf2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
639 #ifdef HAVE_truncxftqf2
640 if (HAVE_truncxftqf2
&& from_mode
== XFmode
&& to_mode
== TQFmode
)
642 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncxftqf2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
646 #ifdef HAVE_trunctftqf2
647 if (HAVE_trunctftqf2
&& from_mode
== TFmode
&& to_mode
== TQFmode
)
649 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunctftqf2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
654 #ifdef HAVE_truncdfsf2
655 if (HAVE_truncdfsf2
&& from_mode
== DFmode
&& to_mode
== SFmode
)
657 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncdfsf2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
661 #ifdef HAVE_truncxfsf2
662 if (HAVE_truncxfsf2
&& from_mode
== XFmode
&& to_mode
== SFmode
)
664 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncxfsf2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
668 #ifdef HAVE_trunctfsf2
669 if (HAVE_trunctfsf2
&& from_mode
== TFmode
&& to_mode
== SFmode
)
671 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunctfsf2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
675 #ifdef HAVE_truncxfdf2
676 if (HAVE_truncxfdf2
&& from_mode
== XFmode
&& to_mode
== DFmode
)
678 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncxfdf2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
682 #ifdef HAVE_trunctfdf2
683 if (HAVE_trunctfdf2
&& from_mode
== TFmode
&& to_mode
== DFmode
)
685 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunctfdf2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
697 libcall
= extendsfdf2_libfunc
;
701 libcall
= extendsfxf2_libfunc
;
705 libcall
= extendsftf2_libfunc
;
717 libcall
= truncdfsf2_libfunc
;
721 libcall
= extenddfxf2_libfunc
;
725 libcall
= extenddftf2_libfunc
;
737 libcall
= truncxfsf2_libfunc
;
741 libcall
= truncxfdf2_libfunc
;
753 libcall
= trunctfsf2_libfunc
;
757 libcall
= trunctfdf2_libfunc
;
769 if (libcall
== (rtx
) 0)
770 /* This conversion is not implemented yet. */
773 value
= emit_library_call_value (libcall
, NULL_RTX
, 1, to_mode
,
775 emit_move_insn (to
, value
);
779 /* Now both modes are integers. */
781 /* Handle expanding beyond a word. */
782 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode
) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode
)
783 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode
) > BITS_PER_WORD
)
790 enum machine_mode lowpart_mode
;
791 int nwords
= CEIL (GET_MODE_SIZE (to_mode
), UNITS_PER_WORD
);
793 /* Try converting directly if the insn is supported. */
794 if ((code
= can_extend_p (to_mode
, from_mode
, unsignedp
))
797 /* If FROM is a SUBREG, put it into a register. Do this
798 so that we always generate the same set of insns for
799 better cse'ing; if an intermediate assignment occurred,
800 we won't be doing the operation directly on the SUBREG. */
801 if (optimize
> 0 && GET_CODE (from
) == SUBREG
)
802 from
= force_reg (from_mode
, from
);
803 emit_unop_insn (code
, to
, from
, equiv_code
);
806 /* Next, try converting via full word. */
807 else if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode
) < BITS_PER_WORD
808 && ((code
= can_extend_p (to_mode
, word_mode
, unsignedp
))
809 != CODE_FOR_nothing
))
811 if (GET_CODE (to
) == REG
)
812 emit_insn (gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode
, to
));
813 convert_move (gen_lowpart (word_mode
, to
), from
, unsignedp
);
814 emit_unop_insn (code
, to
,
815 gen_lowpart (word_mode
, to
), equiv_code
);
819 /* No special multiword conversion insn; do it by hand. */
822 /* Since we will turn this into a no conflict block, we must ensure
823 that the source does not overlap the target. */
825 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (to
, from
))
826 from
= force_reg (from_mode
, from
);
828 /* Get a copy of FROM widened to a word, if necessary. */
829 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode
) < BITS_PER_WORD
)
830 lowpart_mode
= word_mode
;
832 lowpart_mode
= from_mode
;
834 lowfrom
= convert_to_mode (lowpart_mode
, from
, unsignedp
);
836 lowpart
= gen_lowpart (lowpart_mode
, to
);
837 emit_move_insn (lowpart
, lowfrom
);
839 /* Compute the value to put in each remaining word. */
841 fill_value
= const0_rtx
;
846 && insn_data
[(int) CODE_FOR_slt
].operand
[0].mode
== word_mode
847 && STORE_FLAG_VALUE
== -1)
849 emit_cmp_insn (lowfrom
, const0_rtx
, NE
, NULL_RTX
,
851 fill_value
= gen_reg_rtx (word_mode
);
852 emit_insn (gen_slt (fill_value
));
858 = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR
, lowpart_mode
, lowfrom
,
859 size_int (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (lowpart_mode
) - 1),
861 fill_value
= convert_to_mode (word_mode
, fill_value
, 1);
865 /* Fill the remaining words. */
866 for (i
= GET_MODE_SIZE (lowpart_mode
) / UNITS_PER_WORD
; i
< nwords
; i
++)
868 int index
= (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
? nwords
- i
- 1 : i
);
869 rtx subword
= operand_subword (to
, index
, 1, to_mode
);
874 if (fill_value
!= subword
)
875 emit_move_insn (subword
, fill_value
);
878 insns
= get_insns ();
881 emit_no_conflict_block (insns
, to
, from
, NULL_RTX
,
882 gen_rtx_fmt_e (equiv_code
, to_mode
, copy_rtx (from
)));
886 /* Truncating multi-word to a word or less. */
887 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode
) > BITS_PER_WORD
888 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode
) <= BITS_PER_WORD
)
890 if (!((GET_CODE (from
) == MEM
891 && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (from
)
892 && direct_load
[(int) to_mode
]
893 && ! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (from
, 0)))
894 || GET_CODE (from
) == REG
895 || GET_CODE (from
) == SUBREG
))
896 from
= force_reg (from_mode
, from
);
897 convert_move (to
, gen_lowpart (word_mode
, from
), 0);
901 /* Handle pointer conversion */ /* SPEE 900220 */
902 if (to_mode
== PQImode
)
904 if (from_mode
!= QImode
)
905 from
= convert_to_mode (QImode
, from
, unsignedp
);
907 #ifdef HAVE_truncqipqi2
908 if (HAVE_truncqipqi2
)
910 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncqipqi2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
913 #endif /* HAVE_truncqipqi2 */
917 if (from_mode
== PQImode
)
919 if (to_mode
!= QImode
)
921 from
= convert_to_mode (QImode
, from
, unsignedp
);
926 #ifdef HAVE_extendpqiqi2
927 if (HAVE_extendpqiqi2
)
929 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_extendpqiqi2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
932 #endif /* HAVE_extendpqiqi2 */
937 if (to_mode
== PSImode
)
939 if (from_mode
!= SImode
)
940 from
= convert_to_mode (SImode
, from
, unsignedp
);
942 #ifdef HAVE_truncsipsi2
943 if (HAVE_truncsipsi2
)
945 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncsipsi2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
948 #endif /* HAVE_truncsipsi2 */
952 if (from_mode
== PSImode
)
954 if (to_mode
!= SImode
)
956 from
= convert_to_mode (SImode
, from
, unsignedp
);
961 #ifdef HAVE_extendpsisi2
962 if (HAVE_extendpsisi2
)
964 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_extendpsisi2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
967 #endif /* HAVE_extendpsisi2 */
972 if (to_mode
== PDImode
)
974 if (from_mode
!= DImode
)
975 from
= convert_to_mode (DImode
, from
, unsignedp
);
977 #ifdef HAVE_truncdipdi2
978 if (HAVE_truncdipdi2
)
980 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncdipdi2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
983 #endif /* HAVE_truncdipdi2 */
987 if (from_mode
== PDImode
)
989 if (to_mode
!= DImode
)
991 from
= convert_to_mode (DImode
, from
, unsignedp
);
996 #ifdef HAVE_extendpdidi2
997 if (HAVE_extendpdidi2
)
999 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_extendpdidi2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
1002 #endif /* HAVE_extendpdidi2 */
1007 /* Now follow all the conversions between integers
1008 no more than a word long. */
1010 /* For truncation, usually we can just refer to FROM in a narrower mode. */
1011 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode
) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode
)
1012 && TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode
),
1013 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode
)))
1015 if (!((GET_CODE (from
) == MEM
1016 && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (from
)
1017 && direct_load
[(int) to_mode
]
1018 && ! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (from
, 0)))
1019 || GET_CODE (from
) == REG
1020 || GET_CODE (from
) == SUBREG
))
1021 from
= force_reg (from_mode
, from
);
1022 if (GET_CODE (from
) == REG
&& REGNO (from
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1023 && ! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (from
), to_mode
))
1024 from
= copy_to_reg (from
);
1025 emit_move_insn (to
, gen_lowpart (to_mode
, from
));
1029 /* Handle extension. */
1030 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode
) > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode
))
1032 /* Convert directly if that works. */
1033 if ((code
= can_extend_p (to_mode
, from_mode
, unsignedp
))
1034 != CODE_FOR_nothing
)
1036 emit_unop_insn (code
, to
, from
, equiv_code
);
1041 enum machine_mode intermediate
;
1045 /* Search for a mode to convert via. */
1046 for (intermediate
= from_mode
; intermediate
!= VOIDmode
;
1047 intermediate
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (intermediate
))
1048 if (((can_extend_p (to_mode
, intermediate
, unsignedp
)
1049 != CODE_FOR_nothing
)
1050 || (GET_MODE_SIZE (to_mode
) < GET_MODE_SIZE (intermediate
)
1051 && TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode
),
1052 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (intermediate
))))
1053 && (can_extend_p (intermediate
, from_mode
, unsignedp
)
1054 != CODE_FOR_nothing
))
1056 convert_move (to
, convert_to_mode (intermediate
, from
,
1057 unsignedp
), unsignedp
);
1061 /* No suitable intermediate mode.
1062 Generate what we need with shifts. */
1063 shift_amount
= build_int_2 (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode
)
1064 - GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode
), 0);
1065 from
= gen_lowpart (to_mode
, force_reg (from_mode
, from
));
1066 tmp
= expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR
, to_mode
, from
, shift_amount
,
1068 tmp
= expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR
, to_mode
, tmp
, shift_amount
,
1071 emit_move_insn (to
, tmp
);
1076 /* Support special truncate insns for certain modes. */
1078 if (from_mode
== DImode
&& to_mode
== SImode
)
1080 #ifdef HAVE_truncdisi2
1081 if (HAVE_truncdisi2
)
1083 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncdisi2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
1087 convert_move (to
, force_reg (from_mode
, from
), unsignedp
);
1091 if (from_mode
== DImode
&& to_mode
== HImode
)
1093 #ifdef HAVE_truncdihi2
1094 if (HAVE_truncdihi2
)
1096 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncdihi2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
1100 convert_move (to
, force_reg (from_mode
, from
), unsignedp
);
1104 if (from_mode
== DImode
&& to_mode
== QImode
)
1106 #ifdef HAVE_truncdiqi2
1107 if (HAVE_truncdiqi2
)
1109 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncdiqi2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
1113 convert_move (to
, force_reg (from_mode
, from
), unsignedp
);
1117 if (from_mode
== SImode
&& to_mode
== HImode
)
1119 #ifdef HAVE_truncsihi2
1120 if (HAVE_truncsihi2
)
1122 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncsihi2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
1126 convert_move (to
, force_reg (from_mode
, from
), unsignedp
);
1130 if (from_mode
== SImode
&& to_mode
== QImode
)
1132 #ifdef HAVE_truncsiqi2
1133 if (HAVE_truncsiqi2
)
1135 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncsiqi2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
1139 convert_move (to
, force_reg (from_mode
, from
), unsignedp
);
1143 if (from_mode
== HImode
&& to_mode
== QImode
)
1145 #ifdef HAVE_trunchiqi2
1146 if (HAVE_trunchiqi2
)
1148 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunchiqi2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
1152 convert_move (to
, force_reg (from_mode
, from
), unsignedp
);
1156 if (from_mode
== TImode
&& to_mode
== DImode
)
1158 #ifdef HAVE_trunctidi2
1159 if (HAVE_trunctidi2
)
1161 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunctidi2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
1165 convert_move (to
, force_reg (from_mode
, from
), unsignedp
);
1169 if (from_mode
== TImode
&& to_mode
== SImode
)
1171 #ifdef HAVE_trunctisi2
1172 if (HAVE_trunctisi2
)
1174 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunctisi2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
1178 convert_move (to
, force_reg (from_mode
, from
), unsignedp
);
1182 if (from_mode
== TImode
&& to_mode
== HImode
)
1184 #ifdef HAVE_trunctihi2
1185 if (HAVE_trunctihi2
)
1187 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunctihi2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
1191 convert_move (to
, force_reg (from_mode
, from
), unsignedp
);
1195 if (from_mode
== TImode
&& to_mode
== QImode
)
1197 #ifdef HAVE_trunctiqi2
1198 if (HAVE_trunctiqi2
)
1200 emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunctiqi2
, to
, from
, UNKNOWN
);
1204 convert_move (to
, force_reg (from_mode
, from
), unsignedp
);
1208 /* Handle truncation of volatile memrefs, and so on;
1209 the things that couldn't be truncated directly,
1210 and for which there was no special instruction. */
1211 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode
) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode
))
1213 rtx temp
= force_reg (to_mode
, gen_lowpart (to_mode
, from
));
1214 emit_move_insn (to
, temp
);
1218 /* Mode combination is not recognized. */
1222 /* Return an rtx for a value that would result
1223 from converting X to mode MODE.
1224 Both X and MODE may be floating, or both integer.
1225 UNSIGNEDP is nonzero if X is an unsigned value.
1226 This can be done by referring to a part of X in place
1227 or by copying to a new temporary with conversion.
1229 This function *must not* call protect_from_queue
1230 except when putting X into an insn (in which case convert_move does it). */
1233 convert_to_mode (mode
, x
, unsignedp
)
1234 enum machine_mode mode
;
1238 return convert_modes (mode
, VOIDmode
, x
, unsignedp
);
1241 /* Return an rtx for a value that would result
1242 from converting X from mode OLDMODE to mode MODE.
1243 Both modes may be floating, or both integer.
1244 UNSIGNEDP is nonzero if X is an unsigned value.
1246 This can be done by referring to a part of X in place
1247 or by copying to a new temporary with conversion.
1249 You can give VOIDmode for OLDMODE, if you are sure X has a nonvoid mode.
1251 This function *must not* call protect_from_queue
1252 except when putting X into an insn (in which case convert_move does it). */
1255 convert_modes (mode
, oldmode
, x
, unsignedp
)
1256 enum machine_mode mode
, oldmode
;
1262 /* If FROM is a SUBREG that indicates that we have already done at least
1263 the required extension, strip it. */
1265 if (GET_CODE (x
) == SUBREG
&& SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (x
)
1266 && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x
))) >= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
)
1267 && SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (x
) == unsignedp
)
1268 x
= gen_lowpart (mode
, x
);
1270 if (GET_MODE (x
) != VOIDmode
)
1271 oldmode
= GET_MODE (x
);
1273 if (mode
== oldmode
)
1276 /* There is one case that we must handle specially: If we are converting
1277 a CONST_INT into a mode whose size is twice HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT and
1278 we are to interpret the constant as unsigned, gen_lowpart will do
1279 the wrong if the constant appears negative. What we want to do is
1280 make the high-order word of the constant zero, not all ones. */
1282 if (unsignedp
&& GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
1283 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) == 2 * HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
1284 && GET_CODE (x
) == CONST_INT
&& INTVAL (x
) < 0)
1286 HOST_WIDE_INT val
= INTVAL (x
);
1288 if (oldmode
!= VOIDmode
1289 && HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
> GET_MODE_BITSIZE (oldmode
))
1291 int width
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (oldmode
);
1293 /* We need to zero extend VAL. */
1294 val
&= ((HOST_WIDE_INT
) 1 << width
) - 1;
1297 return immed_double_const (val
, (HOST_WIDE_INT
) 0, mode
);
1300 /* We can do this with a gen_lowpart if both desired and current modes
1301 are integer, and this is either a constant integer, a register, or a
1302 non-volatile MEM. Except for the constant case where MODE is no
1303 wider than HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT, we must be narrowing the operand. */
1305 if ((GET_CODE (x
) == CONST_INT
1306 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
1307 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
1308 && GET_MODE_CLASS (oldmode
) == MODE_INT
1309 && (GET_CODE (x
) == CONST_DOUBLE
1310 || (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (oldmode
)
1311 && ((GET_CODE (x
) == MEM
&& ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (x
)
1312 && direct_load
[(int) mode
])
1313 || (GET_CODE (x
) == REG
1314 && TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
),
1315 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (x
)))))))))
1317 /* ?? If we don't know OLDMODE, we have to assume here that
1318 X does not need sign- or zero-extension. This may not be
1319 the case, but it's the best we can do. */
1320 if (GET_CODE (x
) == CONST_INT
&& oldmode
!= VOIDmode
1321 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) > GET_MODE_SIZE (oldmode
))
1323 HOST_WIDE_INT val
= INTVAL (x
);
1324 int width
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (oldmode
);
1326 /* We must sign or zero-extend in this case. Start by
1327 zero-extending, then sign extend if we need to. */
1328 val
&= ((HOST_WIDE_INT
) 1 << width
) - 1;
1330 && (val
& ((HOST_WIDE_INT
) 1 << (width
- 1))))
1331 val
|= (HOST_WIDE_INT
) (-1) << width
;
1333 return GEN_INT (val
);
1336 return gen_lowpart (mode
, x
);
1339 temp
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
1340 convert_move (temp
, x
, unsignedp
);
1345 /* This macro is used to determine what the largest unit size that
1346 move_by_pieces can use is. */
1348 /* MOVE_MAX_PIECES is the number of bytes at a time which we can
1349 move efficiently, as opposed to MOVE_MAX which is the maximum
1350 number of bhytes we can move with a single instruction. */
1352 #ifndef MOVE_MAX_PIECES
1353 #define MOVE_MAX_PIECES MOVE_MAX
1356 /* Generate several move instructions to copy LEN bytes
1357 from block FROM to block TO. (These are MEM rtx's with BLKmode).
1358 The caller must pass FROM and TO
1359 through protect_from_queue before calling.
1360 ALIGN (in bytes) is maximum alignment we can assume. */
1363 move_by_pieces (to
, from
, len
, align
)
1368 struct move_by_pieces data
;
1369 rtx to_addr
= XEXP (to
, 0), from_addr
= XEXP (from
, 0);
1370 int max_size
= MOVE_MAX_PIECES
+ 1;
1371 enum machine_mode mode
= VOIDmode
, tmode
;
1372 enum insn_code icode
;
1375 data
.to_addr
= to_addr
;
1376 data
.from_addr
= from_addr
;
1380 = (GET_CODE (to_addr
) == PRE_INC
|| GET_CODE (to_addr
) == PRE_DEC
1381 || GET_CODE (to_addr
) == POST_INC
|| GET_CODE (to_addr
) == POST_DEC
);
1383 = (GET_CODE (from_addr
) == PRE_INC
|| GET_CODE (from_addr
) == PRE_DEC
1384 || GET_CODE (from_addr
) == POST_INC
1385 || GET_CODE (from_addr
) == POST_DEC
);
1387 data
.explicit_inc_from
= 0;
1388 data
.explicit_inc_to
= 0;
1390 = (GET_CODE (to_addr
) == PRE_DEC
|| GET_CODE (to_addr
) == POST_DEC
);
1391 if (data
.reverse
) data
.offset
= len
;
1394 data
.to_struct
= MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (to
);
1395 data
.from_struct
= MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (from
);
1396 data
.to_readonly
= RTX_UNCHANGING_P (to
);
1397 data
.from_readonly
= RTX_UNCHANGING_P (from
);
1399 /* If copying requires more than two move insns,
1400 copy addresses to registers (to make displacements shorter)
1401 and use post-increment if available. */
1402 if (!(data
.autinc_from
&& data
.autinc_to
)
1403 && move_by_pieces_ninsns (len
, align
) > 2)
1405 /* Find the mode of the largest move... */
1406 for (tmode
= GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT
);
1407 tmode
!= VOIDmode
; tmode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode
))
1408 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode
) < max_size
)
1411 if (USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT (mode
) && data
.reverse
&& ! data
.autinc_from
)
1413 data
.from_addr
= copy_addr_to_reg (plus_constant (from_addr
, len
));
1414 data
.autinc_from
= 1;
1415 data
.explicit_inc_from
= -1;
1417 if (USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT (mode
) && ! data
.autinc_from
)
1419 data
.from_addr
= copy_addr_to_reg (from_addr
);
1420 data
.autinc_from
= 1;
1421 data
.explicit_inc_from
= 1;
1423 if (!data
.autinc_from
&& CONSTANT_P (from_addr
))
1424 data
.from_addr
= copy_addr_to_reg (from_addr
);
1425 if (USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (mode
) && data
.reverse
&& ! data
.autinc_to
)
1427 data
.to_addr
= copy_addr_to_reg (plus_constant (to_addr
, len
));
1429 data
.explicit_inc_to
= -1;
1431 if (USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (mode
) && ! data
.reverse
&& ! data
.autinc_to
)
1433 data
.to_addr
= copy_addr_to_reg (to_addr
);
1435 data
.explicit_inc_to
= 1;
1437 if (!data
.autinc_to
&& CONSTANT_P (to_addr
))
1438 data
.to_addr
= copy_addr_to_reg (to_addr
);
1441 if (! SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (word_mode
, align
)
1442 || align
> MOVE_MAX
|| align
>= BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
)
1445 /* First move what we can in the largest integer mode, then go to
1446 successively smaller modes. */
1448 while (max_size
> 1)
1450 for (tmode
= GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT
);
1451 tmode
!= VOIDmode
; tmode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode
))
1452 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode
) < max_size
)
1455 if (mode
== VOIDmode
)
1458 icode
= mov_optab
->handlers
[(int) mode
].insn_code
;
1459 if (icode
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
1460 && align
>= MIN (BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
,
1461 (unsigned int) GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
)))
1462 move_by_pieces_1 (GEN_FCN (icode
), mode
, &data
);
1464 max_size
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
1467 /* The code above should have handled everything. */
1472 /* Return number of insns required to move L bytes by pieces.
1473 ALIGN (in bytes) is maximum alignment we can assume. */
1476 move_by_pieces_ninsns (l
, align
)
1480 register int n_insns
= 0;
1481 int max_size
= MOVE_MAX
+ 1;
1483 if (! SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (word_mode
, align
)
1484 || align
> MOVE_MAX
|| align
>= BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
)
1487 while (max_size
> 1)
1489 enum machine_mode mode
= VOIDmode
, tmode
;
1490 enum insn_code icode
;
1492 for (tmode
= GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT
);
1493 tmode
!= VOIDmode
; tmode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode
))
1494 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode
) < max_size
)
1497 if (mode
== VOIDmode
)
1500 icode
= mov_optab
->handlers
[(int) mode
].insn_code
;
1501 if (icode
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
1502 && align
>= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
) / BITS_PER_UNIT
)
1503 n_insns
+= l
/ GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
), l
%= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
1505 max_size
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
1511 /* Subroutine of move_by_pieces. Move as many bytes as appropriate
1512 with move instructions for mode MODE. GENFUN is the gen_... function
1513 to make a move insn for that mode. DATA has all the other info. */
1516 move_by_pieces_1 (genfun
, mode
, data
)
1517 rtx (*genfun
) PARAMS ((rtx
, ...));
1518 enum machine_mode mode
;
1519 struct move_by_pieces
*data
;
1521 register int size
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
1522 register rtx to1
, from1
;
1524 while (data
->len
>= size
)
1526 if (data
->reverse
) data
->offset
-= size
;
1528 to1
= (data
->autinc_to
1529 ? gen_rtx_MEM (mode
, data
->to_addr
)
1530 : copy_rtx (change_address (data
->to
, mode
,
1531 plus_constant (data
->to_addr
,
1533 MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (to1
) = data
->to_struct
;
1534 RTX_UNCHANGING_P (to1
) = data
->to_readonly
;
1537 = (data
->autinc_from
1538 ? gen_rtx_MEM (mode
, data
->from_addr
)
1539 : copy_rtx (change_address (data
->from
, mode
,
1540 plus_constant (data
->from_addr
,
1542 MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (from1
) = data
->from_struct
;
1543 RTX_UNCHANGING_P (from1
) = data
->from_readonly
;
1545 if (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
&& data
->explicit_inc_to
< 0)
1546 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data
->to_addr
, GEN_INT (-size
)));
1547 if (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
&& data
->explicit_inc_from
< 0)
1548 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data
->from_addr
, GEN_INT (-size
)));
1550 emit_insn ((*genfun
) (to1
, from1
));
1551 if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
&& data
->explicit_inc_to
> 0)
1552 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data
->to_addr
, GEN_INT (size
)));
1553 if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
&& data
->explicit_inc_from
> 0)
1554 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data
->from_addr
, GEN_INT (size
)));
1556 if (! data
->reverse
) data
->offset
+= size
;
1562 /* Emit code to move a block Y to a block X.
1563 This may be done with string-move instructions,
1564 with multiple scalar move instructions, or with a library call.
1566 Both X and Y must be MEM rtx's (perhaps inside VOLATILE)
1568 SIZE is an rtx that says how long they are.
1569 ALIGN is the maximum alignment we can assume they have,
1572 Return the address of the new block, if memcpy is called and returns it,
1576 emit_block_move (x
, y
, size
, align
)
1582 #ifdef TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
1584 tree call_expr
, arg_list
;
1587 if (GET_MODE (x
) != BLKmode
)
1590 if (GET_MODE (y
) != BLKmode
)
1593 x
= protect_from_queue (x
, 1);
1594 y
= protect_from_queue (y
, 0);
1595 size
= protect_from_queue (size
, 0);
1597 if (GET_CODE (x
) != MEM
)
1599 if (GET_CODE (y
) != MEM
)
1604 if (GET_CODE (size
) == CONST_INT
&& MOVE_BY_PIECES_P (INTVAL (size
), align
))
1605 move_by_pieces (x
, y
, INTVAL (size
), align
);
1608 /* Try the most limited insn first, because there's no point
1609 including more than one in the machine description unless
1610 the more limited one has some advantage. */
1612 rtx opalign
= GEN_INT (align
);
1613 enum machine_mode mode
;
1615 for (mode
= GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT
); mode
!= VOIDmode
;
1616 mode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode
))
1618 enum insn_code code
= movstr_optab
[(int) mode
];
1619 insn_operand_predicate_fn pred
;
1621 if (code
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
1622 /* We don't need MODE to be narrower than BITS_PER_HOST_WIDE_INT
1623 here because if SIZE is less than the mode mask, as it is
1624 returned by the macro, it will definitely be less than the
1625 actual mode mask. */
1626 && ((GET_CODE (size
) == CONST_INT
1627 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) INTVAL (size
)
1628 <= (GET_MODE_MASK (mode
) >> 1)))
1629 || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) >= BITS_PER_WORD
)
1630 && ((pred
= insn_data
[(int) code
].operand
[0].predicate
) == 0
1631 || (*pred
) (x
, BLKmode
))
1632 && ((pred
= insn_data
[(int) code
].operand
[1].predicate
) == 0
1633 || (*pred
) (y
, BLKmode
))
1634 && ((pred
= insn_data
[(int) code
].operand
[3].predicate
) == 0
1635 || (*pred
) (opalign
, VOIDmode
)))
1638 rtx last
= get_last_insn ();
1641 op2
= convert_to_mode (mode
, size
, 1);
1642 pred
= insn_data
[(int) code
].operand
[2].predicate
;
1643 if (pred
!= 0 && ! (*pred
) (op2
, mode
))
1644 op2
= copy_to_mode_reg (mode
, op2
);
1646 pat
= GEN_FCN ((int) code
) (x
, y
, op2
, opalign
);
1653 delete_insns_since (last
);
1657 /* X, Y, or SIZE may have been passed through protect_from_queue.
1659 It is unsafe to save the value generated by protect_from_queue
1660 and reuse it later. Consider what happens if emit_queue is
1661 called before the return value from protect_from_queue is used.
1663 Expansion of the CALL_EXPR below will call emit_queue before
1664 we are finished emitting RTL for argument setup. So if we are
1665 not careful we could get the wrong value for an argument.
1667 To avoid this problem we go ahead and emit code to copy X, Y &
1668 SIZE into new pseudos. We can then place those new pseudos
1669 into an RTL_EXPR and use them later, even after a call to
1672 Note this is not strictly needed for library calls since they
1673 do not call emit_queue before loading their arguments. However,
1674 we may need to have library calls call emit_queue in the future
1675 since failing to do so could cause problems for targets which
1676 define SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES and pass arguments in registers. */
1677 x
= copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode
, XEXP (x
, 0));
1678 y
= copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode
, XEXP (y
, 0));
1680 #ifdef TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
1681 size
= copy_to_mode_reg (TYPE_MODE (sizetype
), size
);
1683 size
= convert_to_mode (TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node
), size
,
1684 TREE_UNSIGNED (integer_type_node
));
1685 size
= copy_to_mode_reg (TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node
), size
);
1688 #ifdef TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
1689 /* It is incorrect to use the libcall calling conventions to call
1690 memcpy in this context.
1692 This could be a user call to memcpy and the user may wish to
1693 examine the return value from memcpy.
1695 For targets where libcalls and normal calls have different conventions
1696 for returning pointers, we could end up generating incorrect code.
1698 So instead of using a libcall sequence we build up a suitable
1699 CALL_EXPR and expand the call in the normal fashion. */
1700 if (fn
== NULL_TREE
)
1704 /* This was copied from except.c, I don't know if all this is
1705 necessary in this context or not. */
1706 fn
= get_identifier ("memcpy");
1707 push_obstacks_nochange ();
1708 end_temporary_allocation ();
1709 fntype
= build_pointer_type (void_type_node
);
1710 fntype
= build_function_type (fntype
, NULL_TREE
);
1711 fn
= build_decl (FUNCTION_DECL
, fn
, fntype
);
1712 ggc_add_tree_root (&fn
, 1);
1713 DECL_EXTERNAL (fn
) = 1;
1714 TREE_PUBLIC (fn
) = 1;
1715 DECL_ARTIFICIAL (fn
) = 1;
1716 make_decl_rtl (fn
, NULL_PTR
, 1);
1717 assemble_external (fn
);
1721 /* We need to make an argument list for the function call.
1723 memcpy has three arguments, the first two are void * addresses and
1724 the last is a size_t byte count for the copy. */
1726 = build_tree_list (NULL_TREE
,
1727 make_tree (build_pointer_type (void_type_node
), x
));
1728 TREE_CHAIN (arg_list
)
1729 = build_tree_list (NULL_TREE
,
1730 make_tree (build_pointer_type (void_type_node
), y
));
1731 TREE_CHAIN (TREE_CHAIN (arg_list
))
1732 = build_tree_list (NULL_TREE
, make_tree (sizetype
, size
));
1733 TREE_CHAIN (TREE_CHAIN (TREE_CHAIN (arg_list
))) = NULL_TREE
;
1735 /* Now we have to build up the CALL_EXPR itself. */
1736 call_expr
= build1 (ADDR_EXPR
, build_pointer_type (TREE_TYPE (fn
)), fn
);
1737 call_expr
= build (CALL_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (fn
)),
1738 call_expr
, arg_list
, NULL_TREE
);
1739 TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (call_expr
) = 1;
1741 retval
= expand_expr (call_expr
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
1743 emit_library_call (bcopy_libfunc
, 0,
1744 VOIDmode
, 3, y
, Pmode
, x
, Pmode
,
1745 convert_to_mode (TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node
), size
,
1746 TREE_UNSIGNED (integer_type_node
)),
1747 TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node
));
1754 /* Copy all or part of a value X into registers starting at REGNO.
1755 The number of registers to be filled is NREGS. */
1758 move_block_to_reg (regno
, x
, nregs
, mode
)
1762 enum machine_mode mode
;
1765 #ifdef HAVE_load_multiple
1773 if (CONSTANT_P (x
) && ! LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (x
))
1774 x
= validize_mem (force_const_mem (mode
, x
));
1776 /* See if the machine can do this with a load multiple insn. */
1777 #ifdef HAVE_load_multiple
1778 if (HAVE_load_multiple
)
1780 last
= get_last_insn ();
1781 pat
= gen_load_multiple (gen_rtx_REG (word_mode
, regno
), x
,
1789 delete_insns_since (last
);
1793 for (i
= 0; i
< nregs
; i
++)
1794 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_REG (word_mode
, regno
+ i
),
1795 operand_subword_force (x
, i
, mode
));
1798 /* Copy all or part of a BLKmode value X out of registers starting at REGNO.
1799 The number of registers to be filled is NREGS. SIZE indicates the number
1800 of bytes in the object X. */
1804 move_block_from_reg (regno
, x
, nregs
, size
)
1811 #ifdef HAVE_store_multiple
1815 enum machine_mode mode
;
1817 /* If SIZE is that of a mode no bigger than a word, just use that
1818 mode's store operation. */
1819 if (size
<= UNITS_PER_WORD
1820 && (mode
= mode_for_size (size
* BITS_PER_UNIT
, MODE_INT
, 0)) != BLKmode
)
1822 emit_move_insn (change_address (x
, mode
, NULL
),
1823 gen_rtx_REG (mode
, regno
));
1827 /* Blocks smaller than a word on a BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN machine must be aligned
1828 to the left before storing to memory. Note that the previous test
1829 doesn't handle all cases (e.g. SIZE == 3). */
1830 if (size
< UNITS_PER_WORD
&& BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
)
1832 rtx tem
= operand_subword (x
, 0, 1, BLKmode
);
1838 shift
= expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR
, word_mode
,
1839 gen_rtx_REG (word_mode
, regno
),
1840 build_int_2 ((UNITS_PER_WORD
- size
)
1841 * BITS_PER_UNIT
, 0), NULL_RTX
, 0);
1842 emit_move_insn (tem
, shift
);
1846 /* See if the machine can do this with a store multiple insn. */
1847 #ifdef HAVE_store_multiple
1848 if (HAVE_store_multiple
)
1850 last
= get_last_insn ();
1851 pat
= gen_store_multiple (x
, gen_rtx_REG (word_mode
, regno
),
1859 delete_insns_since (last
);
1863 for (i
= 0; i
< nregs
; i
++)
1865 rtx tem
= operand_subword (x
, i
, 1, BLKmode
);
1870 emit_move_insn (tem
, gen_rtx_REG (word_mode
, regno
+ i
));
1874 /* Emit code to move a block SRC to a block DST, where DST is non-consecutive
1875 registers represented by a PARALLEL. SSIZE represents the total size of
1876 block SRC in bytes, or -1 if not known. ALIGN is the known alignment of
1878 /* ??? If SSIZE % UNITS_PER_WORD != 0, we make the blatent assumption that
1879 the balance will be in what would be the low-order memory addresses, i.e.
1880 left justified for big endian, right justified for little endian. This
1881 happens to be true for the targets currently using this support. If this
1882 ever changes, a new target macro along the lines of FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING
1886 emit_group_load (dst
, orig_src
, ssize
, align
)
1894 if (GET_CODE (dst
) != PARALLEL
)
1897 /* Check for a NULL entry, used to indicate that the parameter goes
1898 both on the stack and in registers. */
1899 if (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst
, 0, 0), 0))
1904 tmps
= (rtx
*) alloca (sizeof(rtx
) * XVECLEN (dst
, 0));
1906 /* If we won't be loading directly from memory, protect the real source
1907 from strange tricks we might play. */
1909 if (GET_CODE (src
) != MEM
)
1911 if (GET_CODE (src
) == VOIDmode
)
1912 src
= gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (dst
));
1914 src
= gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (orig_src
));
1915 emit_move_insn (src
, orig_src
);
1918 /* Process the pieces. */
1919 for (i
= start
; i
< XVECLEN (dst
, 0); i
++)
1921 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst
, 0, i
), 0));
1922 int bytepos
= INTVAL (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst
, 0, i
), 1));
1923 int bytelen
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
1926 /* Handle trailing fragments that run over the size of the struct. */
1927 if (ssize
>= 0 && bytepos
+ bytelen
> ssize
)
1929 shift
= (bytelen
- (ssize
- bytepos
)) * BITS_PER_UNIT
;
1930 bytelen
= ssize
- bytepos
;
1935 /* Optimize the access just a bit. */
1936 if (GET_CODE (src
) == MEM
1937 && align
* BITS_PER_UNIT
>= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
)
1938 && bytepos
* BITS_PER_UNIT
% GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
) == 0
1939 && bytelen
== GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
))
1941 tmps
[i
] = gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
1942 emit_move_insn (tmps
[i
],
1943 change_address (src
, mode
,
1944 plus_constant (XEXP (src
, 0),
1947 else if (GET_CODE (src
) == CONCAT
)
1950 && bytelen
== GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (src
, 0))))
1951 tmps
[i
] = XEXP (src
, 0);
1952 else if (bytepos
== GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (src
, 0)))
1953 && bytelen
== GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (src
, 1))))
1954 tmps
[i
] = XEXP (src
, 1);
1960 tmps
[i
] = extract_bit_field (src
, bytelen
*BITS_PER_UNIT
,
1961 bytepos
*BITS_PER_UNIT
, 1, NULL_RTX
,
1962 mode
, mode
, align
, ssize
);
1965 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
&& shift
)
1967 expand_binop (mode
, ashl_optab
, tmps
[i
], GEN_INT (shift
),
1968 tmps
[i
], 0, OPTAB_WIDEN
);
1973 /* Copy the extracted pieces into the proper (probable) hard regs. */
1974 for (i
= start
; i
< XVECLEN (dst
, 0); i
++)
1975 emit_move_insn (XEXP (XVECEXP (dst
, 0, i
), 0), tmps
[i
]);
1978 /* Emit code to move a block SRC to a block DST, where SRC is non-consecutive
1979 registers represented by a PARALLEL. SSIZE represents the total size of
1980 block DST, or -1 if not known. ALIGN is the known alignment of DST. */
1983 emit_group_store (orig_dst
, src
, ssize
, align
)
1991 if (GET_CODE (src
) != PARALLEL
)
1994 /* Check for a NULL entry, used to indicate that the parameter goes
1995 both on the stack and in registers. */
1996 if (XEXP (XVECEXP (src
, 0, 0), 0))
2001 tmps
= (rtx
*) alloca (sizeof(rtx
) * XVECLEN (src
, 0));
2003 /* Copy the (probable) hard regs into pseudos. */
2004 for (i
= start
; i
< XVECLEN (src
, 0); i
++)
2006 rtx reg
= XEXP (XVECEXP (src
, 0, i
), 0);
2007 tmps
[i
] = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (reg
));
2008 emit_move_insn (tmps
[i
], reg
);
2012 /* If we won't be storing directly into memory, protect the real destination
2013 from strange tricks we might play. */
2015 if (GET_CODE (dst
) == PARALLEL
)
2019 /* We can get a PARALLEL dst if there is a conditional expression in
2020 a return statement. In that case, the dst and src are the same,
2021 so no action is necessary. */
2022 if (rtx_equal_p (dst
, src
))
2025 /* It is unclear if we can ever reach here, but we may as well handle
2026 it. Allocate a temporary, and split this into a store/load to/from
2029 temp
= assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (dst
), ssize
, 0);
2030 emit_group_store (temp
, src
, ssize
, align
);
2031 emit_group_load (dst
, temp
, ssize
, align
);
2034 else if (GET_CODE (dst
) != MEM
)
2036 dst
= gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (orig_dst
));
2037 /* Make life a bit easier for combine. */
2038 emit_move_insn (dst
, const0_rtx
);
2040 else if (! MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (dst
))
2042 /* store_bit_field requires that memory operations have
2043 mem_in_struct_p set; we might not. */
2045 dst
= copy_rtx (orig_dst
);
2046 MEM_SET_IN_STRUCT_P (dst
, 1);
2049 /* Process the pieces. */
2050 for (i
= start
; i
< XVECLEN (src
, 0); i
++)
2052 int bytepos
= INTVAL (XEXP (XVECEXP (src
, 0, i
), 1));
2053 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (tmps
[i
]);
2054 int bytelen
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
2056 /* Handle trailing fragments that run over the size of the struct. */
2057 if (ssize
>= 0 && bytepos
+ bytelen
> ssize
)
2059 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
)
2061 int shift
= (bytelen
- (ssize
- bytepos
)) * BITS_PER_UNIT
;
2062 expand_binop (mode
, ashr_optab
, tmps
[i
], GEN_INT (shift
),
2063 tmps
[i
], 0, OPTAB_WIDEN
);
2065 bytelen
= ssize
- bytepos
;
2068 /* Optimize the access just a bit. */
2069 if (GET_CODE (dst
) == MEM
2070 && align
* BITS_PER_UNIT
>= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
)
2071 && bytepos
* BITS_PER_UNIT
% GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
) == 0
2072 && bytelen
== GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
))
2073 emit_move_insn (change_address (dst
, mode
,
2074 plus_constant (XEXP (dst
, 0),
2078 store_bit_field (dst
, bytelen
* BITS_PER_UNIT
, bytepos
* BITS_PER_UNIT
,
2079 mode
, tmps
[i
], align
, ssize
);
2084 /* Copy from the pseudo into the (probable) hard reg. */
2085 if (GET_CODE (dst
) == REG
)
2086 emit_move_insn (orig_dst
, dst
);
2089 /* Generate code to copy a BLKmode object of TYPE out of a
2090 set of registers starting with SRCREG into TGTBLK. If TGTBLK
2091 is null, a stack temporary is created. TGTBLK is returned.
2093 The primary purpose of this routine is to handle functions
2094 that return BLKmode structures in registers. Some machines
2095 (the PA for example) want to return all small structures
2096 in registers regardless of the structure's alignment. */
2099 copy_blkmode_from_reg (tgtblk
,srcreg
,type
)
2104 int bytes
= int_size_in_bytes (type
);
2105 rtx src
= NULL
, dst
= NULL
;
2106 int bitsize
= MIN (TYPE_ALIGN (type
), BITS_PER_WORD
);
2107 int bitpos
, xbitpos
, big_endian_correction
= 0;
2111 tgtblk
= assign_stack_temp (BLKmode
, bytes
, 0);
2112 MEM_SET_IN_STRUCT_P (tgtblk
, AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type
));
2113 preserve_temp_slots (tgtblk
);
2116 /* This code assumes srcreg is at least a full word. If it isn't,
2117 copy it into a new pseudo which is a full word. */
2118 if (GET_MODE (srcreg
) != BLKmode
2119 && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (srcreg
)) < UNITS_PER_WORD
)
2120 srcreg
= convert_to_mode (word_mode
, srcreg
,
2121 TREE_UNSIGNED (type
));
2123 /* Structures whose size is not a multiple of a word are aligned
2124 to the least significant byte (to the right). On a BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
2125 machine, this means we must skip the empty high order bytes when
2126 calculating the bit offset. */
2127 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
&& bytes
% UNITS_PER_WORD
)
2128 big_endian_correction
= (BITS_PER_WORD
- ((bytes
% UNITS_PER_WORD
)
2131 /* Copy the structure BITSIZE bites at a time.
2133 We could probably emit more efficient code for machines
2134 which do not use strict alignment, but it doesn't seem
2135 worth the effort at the current time. */
2136 for (bitpos
= 0, xbitpos
= big_endian_correction
;
2137 bitpos
< bytes
* BITS_PER_UNIT
;
2138 bitpos
+= bitsize
, xbitpos
+= bitsize
)
2141 /* We need a new source operand each time xbitpos is on a
2142 word boundary and when xbitpos == big_endian_correction
2143 (the first time through). */
2144 if (xbitpos
% BITS_PER_WORD
== 0
2145 || xbitpos
== big_endian_correction
)
2146 src
= operand_subword_force (srcreg
,
2147 xbitpos
/ BITS_PER_WORD
,
2150 /* We need a new destination operand each time bitpos is on
2152 if (bitpos
% BITS_PER_WORD
== 0)
2153 dst
= operand_subword (tgtblk
, bitpos
/ BITS_PER_WORD
, 1, BLKmode
);
2155 /* Use xbitpos for the source extraction (right justified) and
2156 xbitpos for the destination store (left justified). */
2157 store_bit_field (dst
, bitsize
, bitpos
% BITS_PER_WORD
, word_mode
,
2158 extract_bit_field (src
, bitsize
,
2159 xbitpos
% BITS_PER_WORD
, 1,
2160 NULL_RTX
, word_mode
,
2162 bitsize
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
,
2164 bitsize
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
, BITS_PER_WORD
);
2170 /* Add a USE expression for REG to the (possibly empty) list pointed
2171 to by CALL_FUSAGE. REG must denote a hard register. */
2174 use_reg (call_fusage
, reg
)
2175 rtx
*call_fusage
, reg
;
2177 if (GET_CODE (reg
) != REG
2178 || REGNO (reg
) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
2182 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode
,
2183 gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode
, reg
), *call_fusage
);
2186 /* Add USE expressions to *CALL_FUSAGE for each of NREGS consecutive regs,
2187 starting at REGNO. All of these registers must be hard registers. */
2190 use_regs (call_fusage
, regno
, nregs
)
2197 if (regno
+ nregs
> FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
2200 for (i
= 0; i
< nregs
; i
++)
2201 use_reg (call_fusage
, gen_rtx_REG (reg_raw_mode
[regno
+ i
], regno
+ i
));
2204 /* Add USE expressions to *CALL_FUSAGE for each REG contained in the
2205 PARALLEL REGS. This is for calls that pass values in multiple
2206 non-contiguous locations. The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
2209 use_group_regs (call_fusage
, regs
)
2215 for (i
= 0; i
< XVECLEN (regs
, 0); i
++)
2217 rtx reg
= XEXP (XVECEXP (regs
, 0, i
), 0);
2219 /* A NULL entry means the parameter goes both on the stack and in
2220 registers. This can also be a MEM for targets that pass values
2221 partially on the stack and partially in registers. */
2222 if (reg
!= 0 && GET_CODE (reg
) == REG
)
2223 use_reg (call_fusage
, reg
);
2227 /* Generate several move instructions to clear LEN bytes of block TO.
2228 (A MEM rtx with BLKmode). The caller must pass TO through
2229 protect_from_queue before calling. ALIGN (in bytes) is maximum alignment
2233 clear_by_pieces (to
, len
, align
)
2238 struct clear_by_pieces data
;
2239 rtx to_addr
= XEXP (to
, 0);
2240 int max_size
= MOVE_MAX_PIECES
+ 1;
2241 enum machine_mode mode
= VOIDmode
, tmode
;
2242 enum insn_code icode
;
2245 data
.to_addr
= to_addr
;
2248 = (GET_CODE (to_addr
) == PRE_INC
|| GET_CODE (to_addr
) == PRE_DEC
2249 || GET_CODE (to_addr
) == POST_INC
|| GET_CODE (to_addr
) == POST_DEC
);
2251 data
.explicit_inc_to
= 0;
2253 = (GET_CODE (to_addr
) == PRE_DEC
|| GET_CODE (to_addr
) == POST_DEC
);
2254 if (data
.reverse
) data
.offset
= len
;
2257 data
.to_struct
= MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (to
);
2259 /* If copying requires more than two move insns,
2260 copy addresses to registers (to make displacements shorter)
2261 and use post-increment if available. */
2263 && move_by_pieces_ninsns (len
, align
) > 2)
2265 /* Determine the main mode we'll be using */
2266 for (tmode
= GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT
);
2267 tmode
!= VOIDmode
; tmode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode
))
2268 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode
) < max_size
)
2271 if (USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (mode
) && data
.reverse
&& ! data
.autinc_to
)
2273 data
.to_addr
= copy_addr_to_reg (plus_constant (to_addr
, len
));
2275 data
.explicit_inc_to
= -1;
2277 if (USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (mode
) && ! data
.reverse
&& ! data
.autinc_to
)
2279 data
.to_addr
= copy_addr_to_reg (to_addr
);
2281 data
.explicit_inc_to
= 1;
2283 if (!data
.autinc_to
&& CONSTANT_P (to_addr
))
2284 data
.to_addr
= copy_addr_to_reg (to_addr
);
2287 if (! SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (word_mode
, align
)
2288 || align
> MOVE_MAX
|| align
>= BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
)
2291 /* First move what we can in the largest integer mode, then go to
2292 successively smaller modes. */
2294 while (max_size
> 1)
2296 for (tmode
= GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT
);
2297 tmode
!= VOIDmode
; tmode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode
))
2298 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode
) < max_size
)
2301 if (mode
== VOIDmode
)
2304 icode
= mov_optab
->handlers
[(int) mode
].insn_code
;
2305 if (icode
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
2306 && align
>= GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
) / BITS_PER_UNIT
)
2307 clear_by_pieces_1 (GEN_FCN (icode
), mode
, &data
);
2309 max_size
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
2312 /* The code above should have handled everything. */
2317 /* Subroutine of clear_by_pieces. Clear as many bytes as appropriate
2318 with move instructions for mode MODE. GENFUN is the gen_... function
2319 to make a move insn for that mode. DATA has all the other info. */
2322 clear_by_pieces_1 (genfun
, mode
, data
)
2323 rtx (*genfun
) PARAMS ((rtx
, ...));
2324 enum machine_mode mode
;
2325 struct clear_by_pieces
*data
;
2327 register int size
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
);
2330 while (data
->len
>= size
)
2332 if (data
->reverse
) data
->offset
-= size
;
2334 to1
= (data
->autinc_to
2335 ? gen_rtx_MEM (mode
, data
->to_addr
)
2336 : copy_rtx (change_address (data
->to
, mode
,
2337 plus_constant (data
->to_addr
,
2339 MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (to1
) = data
->to_struct
;
2341 if (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
&& data
->explicit_inc_to
< 0)
2342 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data
->to_addr
, GEN_INT (-size
)));
2344 emit_insn ((*genfun
) (to1
, const0_rtx
));
2345 if (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
&& data
->explicit_inc_to
> 0)
2346 emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data
->to_addr
, GEN_INT (size
)));
2348 if (! data
->reverse
) data
->offset
+= size
;
2354 /* Write zeros through the storage of OBJECT.
2355 If OBJECT has BLKmode, SIZE is its length in bytes and ALIGN is
2356 the maximum alignment we can is has, measured in bytes.
2358 If we call a function that returns the length of the block, return it. */
2361 clear_storage (object
, size
, align
)
2366 #ifdef TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
2368 tree call_expr
, arg_list
;
2372 if (GET_MODE (object
) == BLKmode
)
2374 object
= protect_from_queue (object
, 1);
2375 size
= protect_from_queue (size
, 0);
2377 if (GET_CODE (size
) == CONST_INT
2378 && MOVE_BY_PIECES_P (INTVAL (size
), align
))
2379 clear_by_pieces (object
, INTVAL (size
), align
);
2383 /* Try the most limited insn first, because there's no point
2384 including more than one in the machine description unless
2385 the more limited one has some advantage. */
2387 rtx opalign
= GEN_INT (align
);
2388 enum machine_mode mode
;
2390 for (mode
= GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT
); mode
!= VOIDmode
;
2391 mode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode
))
2393 enum insn_code code
= clrstr_optab
[(int) mode
];
2394 insn_operand_predicate_fn pred
;
2396 if (code
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
2397 /* We don't need MODE to be narrower than
2398 BITS_PER_HOST_WIDE_INT here because if SIZE is less than
2399 the mode mask, as it is returned by the macro, it will
2400 definitely be less than the actual mode mask. */
2401 && ((GET_CODE (size
) == CONST_INT
2402 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) INTVAL (size
)
2403 <= (GET_MODE_MASK (mode
) >> 1)))
2404 || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) >= BITS_PER_WORD
)
2405 && ((pred
= insn_data
[(int) code
].operand
[0].predicate
) == 0
2406 || (*pred
) (object
, BLKmode
))
2407 && ((pred
= insn_data
[(int) code
].operand
[2].predicate
) == 0
2408 || (*pred
) (opalign
, VOIDmode
)))
2411 rtx last
= get_last_insn ();
2414 op1
= convert_to_mode (mode
, size
, 1);
2415 pred
= insn_data
[(int) code
].operand
[1].predicate
;
2416 if (pred
!= 0 && ! (*pred
) (op1
, mode
))
2417 op1
= copy_to_mode_reg (mode
, op1
);
2419 pat
= GEN_FCN ((int) code
) (object
, op1
, opalign
);
2426 delete_insns_since (last
);
2430 /* OBJECT or SIZE may have been passed through protect_from_queue.
2432 It is unsafe to save the value generated by protect_from_queue
2433 and reuse it later. Consider what happens if emit_queue is
2434 called before the return value from protect_from_queue is used.
2436 Expansion of the CALL_EXPR below will call emit_queue before
2437 we are finished emitting RTL for argument setup. So if we are
2438 not careful we could get the wrong value for an argument.
2440 To avoid this problem we go ahead and emit code to copy OBJECT
2441 and SIZE into new pseudos. We can then place those new pseudos
2442 into an RTL_EXPR and use them later, even after a call to
2445 Note this is not strictly needed for library calls since they
2446 do not call emit_queue before loading their arguments. However,
2447 we may need to have library calls call emit_queue in the future
2448 since failing to do so could cause problems for targets which
2449 define SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES and pass arguments in registers. */
2450 object
= copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode
, XEXP (object
, 0));
2452 #ifdef TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
2453 size
= copy_to_mode_reg (TYPE_MODE (sizetype
), size
);
2455 size
= convert_to_mode (TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node
), size
,
2456 TREE_UNSIGNED (integer_type_node
));
2457 size
= copy_to_mode_reg (TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node
), size
);
2461 #ifdef TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
2462 /* It is incorrect to use the libcall calling conventions to call
2463 memset in this context.
2465 This could be a user call to memset and the user may wish to
2466 examine the return value from memset.
2468 For targets where libcalls and normal calls have different
2469 conventions for returning pointers, we could end up generating
2472 So instead of using a libcall sequence we build up a suitable
2473 CALL_EXPR and expand the call in the normal fashion. */
2474 if (fn
== NULL_TREE
)
2478 /* This was copied from except.c, I don't know if all this is
2479 necessary in this context or not. */
2480 fn
= get_identifier ("memset");
2481 push_obstacks_nochange ();
2482 end_temporary_allocation ();
2483 fntype
= build_pointer_type (void_type_node
);
2484 fntype
= build_function_type (fntype
, NULL_TREE
);
2485 fn
= build_decl (FUNCTION_DECL
, fn
, fntype
);
2486 ggc_add_tree_root (&fn
, 1);
2487 DECL_EXTERNAL (fn
) = 1;
2488 TREE_PUBLIC (fn
) = 1;
2489 DECL_ARTIFICIAL (fn
) = 1;
2490 make_decl_rtl (fn
, NULL_PTR
, 1);
2491 assemble_external (fn
);
2495 /* We need to make an argument list for the function call.
2497 memset has three arguments, the first is a void * addresses, the
2498 second a integer with the initialization value, the last is a
2499 size_t byte count for the copy. */
2501 = build_tree_list (NULL_TREE
,
2502 make_tree (build_pointer_type (void_type_node
),
2504 TREE_CHAIN (arg_list
)
2505 = build_tree_list (NULL_TREE
,
2506 make_tree (integer_type_node
, const0_rtx
));
2507 TREE_CHAIN (TREE_CHAIN (arg_list
))
2508 = build_tree_list (NULL_TREE
, make_tree (sizetype
, size
));
2509 TREE_CHAIN (TREE_CHAIN (TREE_CHAIN (arg_list
))) = NULL_TREE
;
2511 /* Now we have to build up the CALL_EXPR itself. */
2512 call_expr
= build1 (ADDR_EXPR
,
2513 build_pointer_type (TREE_TYPE (fn
)), fn
);
2514 call_expr
= build (CALL_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (fn
)),
2515 call_expr
, arg_list
, NULL_TREE
);
2516 TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (call_expr
) = 1;
2518 retval
= expand_expr (call_expr
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
2520 emit_library_call (bzero_libfunc
, 0,
2521 VOIDmode
, 2, object
, Pmode
, size
,
2522 TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node
));
2527 emit_move_insn (object
, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (object
)));
2532 /* Generate code to copy Y into X.
2533 Both Y and X must have the same mode, except that
2534 Y can be a constant with VOIDmode.
2535 This mode cannot be BLKmode; use emit_block_move for that.
2537 Return the last instruction emitted. */
2540 emit_move_insn (x
, y
)
2543 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
2545 x
= protect_from_queue (x
, 1);
2546 y
= protect_from_queue (y
, 0);
2548 if (mode
== BLKmode
|| (GET_MODE (y
) != mode
&& GET_MODE (y
) != VOIDmode
))
2551 /* Never force constant_p_rtx to memory. */
2552 if (GET_CODE (y
) == CONSTANT_P_RTX
)
2554 else if (CONSTANT_P (y
) && ! LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (y
))
2555 y
= force_const_mem (mode
, y
);
2557 /* If X or Y are memory references, verify that their addresses are valid
2559 if (GET_CODE (x
) == MEM
2560 && ((! memory_address_p (GET_MODE (x
), XEXP (x
, 0))
2561 && ! push_operand (x
, GET_MODE (x
)))
2563 && CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (XEXP (x
, 0)))))
2564 x
= change_address (x
, VOIDmode
, XEXP (x
, 0));
2566 if (GET_CODE (y
) == MEM
2567 && (! memory_address_p (GET_MODE (y
), XEXP (y
, 0))
2569 && CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (XEXP (y
, 0)))))
2570 y
= change_address (y
, VOIDmode
, XEXP (y
, 0));
2572 if (mode
== BLKmode
)
2575 return emit_move_insn_1 (x
, y
);
2578 /* Low level part of emit_move_insn.
2579 Called just like emit_move_insn, but assumes X and Y
2580 are basically valid. */
2583 emit_move_insn_1 (x
, y
)
2586 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (x
);
2587 enum machine_mode submode
;
2588 enum mode_class
class = GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
);
2591 if (mode
>= MAX_MACHINE_MODE
)
2594 if (mov_optab
->handlers
[(int) mode
].insn_code
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
)
2596 emit_insn (GEN_FCN (mov_optab
->handlers
[(int) mode
].insn_code
) (x
, y
));
2598 /* Expand complex moves by moving real part and imag part, if possible. */
2599 else if ((class == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT
|| class == MODE_COMPLEX_INT
)
2600 && BLKmode
!= (submode
= mode_for_size ((GET_MODE_UNIT_SIZE (mode
)
2602 (class == MODE_COMPLEX_INT
2603 ? MODE_INT
: MODE_FLOAT
),
2605 && (mov_optab
->handlers
[(int) submode
].insn_code
2606 != CODE_FOR_nothing
))
2608 /* Don't split destination if it is a stack push. */
2609 int stack
= push_operand (x
, GET_MODE (x
));
2611 /* If this is a stack, push the highpart first, so it
2612 will be in the argument order.
2614 In that case, change_address is used only to convert
2615 the mode, not to change the address. */
2618 /* Note that the real part always precedes the imag part in memory
2619 regardless of machine's endianness. */
2620 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2621 emit_insn (GEN_FCN (mov_optab
->handlers
[(int) submode
].insn_code
)
2622 (gen_rtx_MEM (submode
, (XEXP (x
, 0))),
2623 gen_imagpart (submode
, y
)));
2624 emit_insn (GEN_FCN (mov_optab
->handlers
[(int) submode
].insn_code
)
2625 (gen_rtx_MEM (submode
, (XEXP (x
, 0))),
2626 gen_realpart (submode
, y
)));
2628 emit_insn (GEN_FCN (mov_optab
->handlers
[(int) submode
].insn_code
)
2629 (gen_rtx_MEM (submode
, (XEXP (x
, 0))),
2630 gen_realpart (submode
, y
)));
2631 emit_insn (GEN_FCN (mov_optab
->handlers
[(int) submode
].insn_code
)
2632 (gen_rtx_MEM (submode
, (XEXP (x
, 0))),
2633 gen_imagpart (submode
, y
)));
2638 rtx realpart_x
, realpart_y
;
2639 rtx imagpart_x
, imagpart_y
;
2641 /* If this is a complex value with each part being smaller than a
2642 word, the usual calling sequence will likely pack the pieces into
2643 a single register. Unfortunately, SUBREG of hard registers only
2644 deals in terms of words, so we have a problem converting input
2645 arguments to the CONCAT of two registers that is used elsewhere
2646 for complex values. If this is before reload, we can copy it into
2647 memory and reload. FIXME, we should see about using extract and
2648 insert on integer registers, but complex short and complex char
2649 variables should be rarely used. */
2650 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) < 2*BITS_PER_WORD
2651 && (reload_in_progress
| reload_completed
) == 0)
2653 int packed_dest_p
= (REG_P (x
) && REGNO (x
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
);
2654 int packed_src_p
= (REG_P (y
) && REGNO (y
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
);
2656 if (packed_dest_p
|| packed_src_p
)
2658 enum mode_class reg_class
= ((class == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT
)
2659 ? MODE_FLOAT
: MODE_INT
);
2661 enum machine_mode reg_mode
=
2662 mode_for_size (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
), reg_class
, 1);
2664 if (reg_mode
!= BLKmode
)
2666 rtx mem
= assign_stack_temp (reg_mode
,
2667 GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
), 0);
2669 rtx cmem
= change_address (mem
, mode
, NULL_RTX
);
2671 cfun
->cannot_inline
= "function uses short complex types";
2675 rtx sreg
= gen_rtx_SUBREG (reg_mode
, x
, 0);
2676 emit_move_insn_1 (cmem
, y
);
2677 return emit_move_insn_1 (sreg
, mem
);
2681 rtx sreg
= gen_rtx_SUBREG (reg_mode
, y
, 0);
2682 emit_move_insn_1 (mem
, sreg
);
2683 return emit_move_insn_1 (x
, cmem
);
2689 realpart_x
= gen_realpart (submode
, x
);
2690 realpart_y
= gen_realpart (submode
, y
);
2691 imagpart_x
= gen_imagpart (submode
, x
);
2692 imagpart_y
= gen_imagpart (submode
, y
);
2694 /* Show the output dies here. This is necessary for SUBREGs
2695 of pseudos since we cannot track their lifetimes correctly;
2696 hard regs shouldn't appear here except as return values.
2697 We never want to emit such a clobber after reload. */
2699 && ! (reload_in_progress
|| reload_completed
)
2700 && (GET_CODE (realpart_x
) == SUBREG
2701 || GET_CODE (imagpart_x
) == SUBREG
))
2703 emit_insn (gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode
, x
));
2706 emit_insn (GEN_FCN (mov_optab
->handlers
[(int) submode
].insn_code
)
2707 (realpart_x
, realpart_y
));
2708 emit_insn (GEN_FCN (mov_optab
->handlers
[(int) submode
].insn_code
)
2709 (imagpart_x
, imagpart_y
));
2712 return get_last_insn ();
2715 /* This will handle any multi-word mode that lacks a move_insn pattern.
2716 However, you will get better code if you define such patterns,
2717 even if they must turn into multiple assembler instructions. */
2718 else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) > UNITS_PER_WORD
)
2724 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
2726 /* If X is a push on the stack, do the push now and replace
2727 X with a reference to the stack pointer. */
2728 if (push_operand (x
, GET_MODE (x
)))
2730 anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x
))));
2731 x
= change_address (x
, VOIDmode
, stack_pointer_rtx
);
2739 i
< (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) + (UNITS_PER_WORD
- 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD
;
2742 rtx xpart
= operand_subword (x
, i
, 1, mode
);
2743 rtx ypart
= operand_subword (y
, i
, 1, mode
);
2745 /* If we can't get a part of Y, put Y into memory if it is a
2746 constant. Otherwise, force it into a register. If we still
2747 can't get a part of Y, abort. */
2748 if (ypart
== 0 && CONSTANT_P (y
))
2750 y
= force_const_mem (mode
, y
);
2751 ypart
= operand_subword (y
, i
, 1, mode
);
2753 else if (ypart
== 0)
2754 ypart
= operand_subword_force (y
, i
, mode
);
2756 if (xpart
== 0 || ypart
== 0)
2759 need_clobber
|= (GET_CODE (xpart
) == SUBREG
);
2761 last_insn
= emit_move_insn (xpart
, ypart
);
2764 seq
= gen_sequence ();
2767 /* Show the output dies here. This is necessary for SUBREGs
2768 of pseudos since we cannot track their lifetimes correctly;
2769 hard regs shouldn't appear here except as return values.
2770 We never want to emit such a clobber after reload. */
2772 && ! (reload_in_progress
|| reload_completed
)
2773 && need_clobber
!= 0)
2775 emit_insn (gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode
, x
));
2786 /* Pushing data onto the stack. */
2788 /* Push a block of length SIZE (perhaps variable)
2789 and return an rtx to address the beginning of the block.
2790 Note that it is not possible for the value returned to be a QUEUED.
2791 The value may be virtual_outgoing_args_rtx.
2793 EXTRA is the number of bytes of padding to push in addition to SIZE.
2794 BELOW nonzero means this padding comes at low addresses;
2795 otherwise, the padding comes at high addresses. */
2798 push_block (size
, extra
, below
)
2804 size
= convert_modes (Pmode
, ptr_mode
, size
, 1);
2805 if (CONSTANT_P (size
))
2806 anti_adjust_stack (plus_constant (size
, extra
));
2807 else if (GET_CODE (size
) == REG
&& extra
== 0)
2808 anti_adjust_stack (size
);
2811 rtx temp
= copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode
, size
);
2813 temp
= expand_binop (Pmode
, add_optab
, temp
, GEN_INT (extra
),
2814 temp
, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
2815 anti_adjust_stack (temp
);
2818 #if defined (STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD) \
2819 || (defined (ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD) \
2820 && !defined (ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS))
2822 /* Return the lowest stack address when STACK or ARGS grow downward and
2823 we are not aaccumulating outgoing arguments (the c4x port uses such
2825 temp
= virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
;
2826 if (extra
!= 0 && below
)
2827 temp
= plus_constant (temp
, extra
);
2829 if (GET_CODE (size
) == CONST_INT
)
2830 temp
= plus_constant (virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
,
2831 - INTVAL (size
) - (below
? 0 : extra
));
2832 else if (extra
!= 0 && !below
)
2833 temp
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
,
2834 negate_rtx (Pmode
, plus_constant (size
, extra
)));
2836 temp
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
,
2837 negate_rtx (Pmode
, size
));
2840 return memory_address (GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT
), temp
);
2846 return gen_rtx_fmt_e (STACK_PUSH_CODE
, Pmode
, stack_pointer_rtx
);
2849 /* Return an rtx for the address of the beginning of a as-if-it-was-pushed
2850 block of SIZE bytes. */
2853 get_push_address (size
)
2858 if (STACK_PUSH_CODE
== POST_DEC
)
2859 temp
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, stack_pointer_rtx
, GEN_INT (size
));
2860 else if (STACK_PUSH_CODE
== POST_INC
)
2861 temp
= gen_rtx_MINUS (Pmode
, stack_pointer_rtx
, GEN_INT (size
));
2863 temp
= stack_pointer_rtx
;
2865 return copy_to_reg (temp
);
2868 /* Generate code to push X onto the stack, assuming it has mode MODE and
2870 MODE is redundant except when X is a CONST_INT (since they don't
2872 SIZE is an rtx for the size of data to be copied (in bytes),
2873 needed only if X is BLKmode.
2875 ALIGN (in bytes) is maximum alignment we can assume.
2877 If PARTIAL and REG are both nonzero, then copy that many of the first
2878 words of X into registers starting with REG, and push the rest of X.
2879 The amount of space pushed is decreased by PARTIAL words,
2880 rounded *down* to a multiple of PARM_BOUNDARY.
2881 REG must be a hard register in this case.
2882 If REG is zero but PARTIAL is not, take any all others actions for an
2883 argument partially in registers, but do not actually load any
2886 EXTRA is the amount in bytes of extra space to leave next to this arg.
2887 This is ignored if an argument block has already been allocated.
2889 On a machine that lacks real push insns, ARGS_ADDR is the address of
2890 the bottom of the argument block for this call. We use indexing off there
2891 to store the arg. On machines with push insns, ARGS_ADDR is 0 when a
2892 argument block has not been preallocated.
2894 ARGS_SO_FAR is the size of args previously pushed for this call.
2896 REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE is nonzero if functions require stack space
2897 for arguments passed in registers. If nonzero, it will be the number
2898 of bytes required. */
2901 emit_push_insn (x
, mode
, type
, size
, align
, partial
, reg
, extra
,
2902 args_addr
, args_so_far
, reg_parm_stack_space
,
2905 enum machine_mode mode
;
2914 int reg_parm_stack_space
;
2918 enum direction stack_direction
2919 #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2925 /* Decide where to pad the argument: `downward' for below,
2926 `upward' for above, or `none' for don't pad it.
2927 Default is below for small data on big-endian machines; else above. */
2928 enum direction where_pad
= FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (mode
, type
);
2930 /* Invert direction if stack is post-update. */
2931 if (STACK_PUSH_CODE
== POST_INC
|| STACK_PUSH_CODE
== POST_DEC
)
2932 if (where_pad
!= none
)
2933 where_pad
= (where_pad
== downward
? upward
: downward
);
2935 xinner
= x
= protect_from_queue (x
, 0);
2937 if (mode
== BLKmode
)
2939 /* Copy a block into the stack, entirely or partially. */
2942 int used
= partial
* UNITS_PER_WORD
;
2943 int offset
= used
% (PARM_BOUNDARY
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
2951 /* USED is now the # of bytes we need not copy to the stack
2952 because registers will take care of them. */
2955 xinner
= change_address (xinner
, BLKmode
,
2956 plus_constant (XEXP (xinner
, 0), used
));
2958 /* If the partial register-part of the arg counts in its stack size,
2959 skip the part of stack space corresponding to the registers.
2960 Otherwise, start copying to the beginning of the stack space,
2961 by setting SKIP to 0. */
2962 skip
= (reg_parm_stack_space
== 0) ? 0 : used
;
2964 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
2965 /* Do it with several push insns if that doesn't take lots of insns
2966 and if there is no difficulty with push insns that skip bytes
2967 on the stack for alignment purposes. */
2969 && GET_CODE (size
) == CONST_INT
2971 && (MOVE_BY_PIECES_P ((unsigned) INTVAL (size
) - used
, align
))
2972 /* Here we avoid the case of a structure whose weak alignment
2973 forces many pushes of a small amount of data,
2974 and such small pushes do rounding that causes trouble. */
2975 && ((! SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (word_mode
, align
))
2976 || align
>= BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
2977 || PUSH_ROUNDING (align
) == align
)
2978 && PUSH_ROUNDING (INTVAL (size
)) == INTVAL (size
))
2980 /* Push padding now if padding above and stack grows down,
2981 or if padding below and stack grows up.
2982 But if space already allocated, this has already been done. */
2983 if (extra
&& args_addr
== 0
2984 && where_pad
!= none
&& where_pad
!= stack_direction
)
2985 anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra
));
2987 move_by_pieces (gen_rtx_MEM (BLKmode
, gen_push_operand ()), xinner
,
2988 INTVAL (size
) - used
, align
);
2990 if (current_function_check_memory_usage
&& ! in_check_memory_usage
)
2994 in_check_memory_usage
= 1;
2995 temp
= get_push_address (INTVAL(size
) - used
);
2996 if (GET_CODE (x
) == MEM
&& type
&& AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type
))
2997 emit_library_call (chkr_copy_bitmap_libfunc
, 1, VOIDmode
, 3,
2999 XEXP (xinner
, 0), Pmode
,
3000 GEN_INT (INTVAL(size
) - used
),
3001 TYPE_MODE (sizetype
));
3003 emit_library_call (chkr_set_right_libfunc
, 1, VOIDmode
, 3,
3005 GEN_INT (INTVAL(size
) - used
),
3006 TYPE_MODE (sizetype
),
3007 GEN_INT (MEMORY_USE_RW
),
3008 TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node
));
3009 in_check_memory_usage
= 0;
3013 #endif /* PUSH_ROUNDING */
3015 /* Otherwise make space on the stack and copy the data
3016 to the address of that space. */
3018 /* Deduct words put into registers from the size we must copy. */
3021 if (GET_CODE (size
) == CONST_INT
)
3022 size
= GEN_INT (INTVAL (size
) - used
);
3024 size
= expand_binop (GET_MODE (size
), sub_optab
, size
,
3025 GEN_INT (used
), NULL_RTX
, 0,
3029 /* Get the address of the stack space.
3030 In this case, we do not deal with EXTRA separately.
3031 A single stack adjust will do. */
3034 temp
= push_block (size
, extra
, where_pad
== downward
);
3037 else if (GET_CODE (args_so_far
) == CONST_INT
)
3038 temp
= memory_address (BLKmode
,
3039 plus_constant (args_addr
,
3040 skip
+ INTVAL (args_so_far
)));
3042 temp
= memory_address (BLKmode
,
3043 plus_constant (gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
,
3047 if (current_function_check_memory_usage
&& ! in_check_memory_usage
)
3051 in_check_memory_usage
= 1;
3052 target
= copy_to_reg (temp
);
3053 if (GET_CODE (x
) == MEM
&& type
&& AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type
))
3054 emit_library_call (chkr_copy_bitmap_libfunc
, 1, VOIDmode
, 3,
3056 XEXP (xinner
, 0), Pmode
,
3057 size
, TYPE_MODE (sizetype
));
3059 emit_library_call (chkr_set_right_libfunc
, 1, VOIDmode
, 3,
3061 size
, TYPE_MODE (sizetype
),
3062 GEN_INT (MEMORY_USE_RW
),
3063 TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node
));
3064 in_check_memory_usage
= 0;
3067 /* TEMP is the address of the block. Copy the data there. */
3068 if (GET_CODE (size
) == CONST_INT
3069 && MOVE_BY_PIECES_P ((unsigned) INTVAL (size
), align
))
3071 move_by_pieces (gen_rtx_MEM (BLKmode
, temp
), xinner
,
3072 INTVAL (size
), align
);
3077 rtx opalign
= GEN_INT (align
);
3078 enum machine_mode mode
;
3079 rtx target
= gen_rtx_MEM (BLKmode
, temp
);
3081 for (mode
= GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT
);
3083 mode
= GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode
))
3085 enum insn_code code
= movstr_optab
[(int) mode
];
3086 insn_operand_predicate_fn pred
;
3088 if (code
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
3089 && ((GET_CODE (size
) == CONST_INT
3090 && ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
) INTVAL (size
)
3091 <= (GET_MODE_MASK (mode
) >> 1)))
3092 || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) >= BITS_PER_WORD
)
3093 && (!(pred
= insn_data
[(int) code
].operand
[0].predicate
)
3094 || ((*pred
) (target
, BLKmode
)))
3095 && (!(pred
= insn_data
[(int) code
].operand
[1].predicate
)
3096 || ((*pred
) (xinner
, BLKmode
)))
3097 && (!(pred
= insn_data
[(int) code
].operand
[3].predicate
)
3098 || ((*pred
) (opalign
, VOIDmode
))))
3100 rtx op2
= convert_to_mode (mode
, size
, 1);
3101 rtx last
= get_last_insn ();
3104 pred
= insn_data
[(int) code
].operand
[2].predicate
;
3105 if (pred
!= 0 && ! (*pred
) (op2
, mode
))
3106 op2
= copy_to_mode_reg (mode
, op2
);
3108 pat
= GEN_FCN ((int) code
) (target
, xinner
,
3116 delete_insns_since (last
);
3121 #ifndef ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
3122 /* If the source is referenced relative to the stack pointer,
3123 copy it to another register to stabilize it. We do not need
3124 to do this if we know that we won't be changing sp. */
3126 if (reg_mentioned_p (virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx
, temp
)
3127 || reg_mentioned_p (virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
, temp
))
3128 temp
= copy_to_reg (temp
);
3131 /* Make inhibit_defer_pop nonzero around the library call
3132 to force it to pop the bcopy-arguments right away. */
3134 #ifdef TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
3135 emit_library_call (memcpy_libfunc
, 0,
3136 VOIDmode
, 3, temp
, Pmode
, XEXP (xinner
, 0), Pmode
,
3137 convert_to_mode (TYPE_MODE (sizetype
),
3138 size
, TREE_UNSIGNED (sizetype
)),
3139 TYPE_MODE (sizetype
));
3141 emit_library_call (bcopy_libfunc
, 0,
3142 VOIDmode
, 3, XEXP (xinner
, 0), Pmode
, temp
, Pmode
,
3143 convert_to_mode (TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node
),
3145 TREE_UNSIGNED (integer_type_node
)),
3146 TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node
));
3151 else if (partial
> 0)
3153 /* Scalar partly in registers. */
3155 int size
= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) / UNITS_PER_WORD
;
3158 /* # words of start of argument
3159 that we must make space for but need not store. */
3160 int offset
= partial
% (PARM_BOUNDARY
/ BITS_PER_WORD
);
3161 int args_offset
= INTVAL (args_so_far
);
3164 /* Push padding now if padding above and stack grows down,
3165 or if padding below and stack grows up.
3166 But if space already allocated, this has already been done. */
3167 if (extra
&& args_addr
== 0
3168 && where_pad
!= none
&& where_pad
!= stack_direction
)
3169 anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra
));
3171 /* If we make space by pushing it, we might as well push
3172 the real data. Otherwise, we can leave OFFSET nonzero
3173 and leave the space uninitialized. */
3177 /* Now NOT_STACK gets the number of words that we don't need to
3178 allocate on the stack. */
3179 not_stack
= partial
- offset
;
3181 /* If the partial register-part of the arg counts in its stack size,
3182 skip the part of stack space corresponding to the registers.
3183 Otherwise, start copying to the beginning of the stack space,
3184 by setting SKIP to 0. */
3185 skip
= (reg_parm_stack_space
== 0) ? 0 : not_stack
;
3187 if (CONSTANT_P (x
) && ! LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (x
))
3188 x
= validize_mem (force_const_mem (mode
, x
));
3190 /* If X is a hard register in a non-integer mode, copy it into a pseudo;
3191 SUBREGs of such registers are not allowed. */
3192 if ((GET_CODE (x
) == REG
&& REGNO (x
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
3193 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x
)) != MODE_INT
))
3194 x
= copy_to_reg (x
);
3196 /* Loop over all the words allocated on the stack for this arg. */
3197 /* We can do it by words, because any scalar bigger than a word
3198 has a size a multiple of a word. */
3199 #ifndef PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
3200 for (i
= not_stack
; i
< size
; i
++)
3202 for (i
= size
- 1; i
>= not_stack
; i
--)
3204 if (i
>= not_stack
+ offset
)
3205 emit_push_insn (operand_subword_force (x
, i
, mode
),
3206 word_mode
, NULL_TREE
, NULL_RTX
, align
, 0, NULL_RTX
,
3208 GEN_INT (args_offset
+ ((i
- not_stack
+ skip
)
3210 reg_parm_stack_space
, alignment_pad
);
3215 rtx target
= NULL_RTX
;
3217 /* Push padding now if padding above and stack grows down,
3218 or if padding below and stack grows up.
3219 But if space already allocated, this has already been done. */
3220 if (extra
&& args_addr
== 0
3221 && where_pad
!= none
&& where_pad
!= stack_direction
)
3222 anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra
));
3224 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
3226 addr
= gen_push_operand ();
3230 if (GET_CODE (args_so_far
) == CONST_INT
)
3232 = memory_address (mode
,
3233 plus_constant (args_addr
,
3234 INTVAL (args_so_far
)));
3236 addr
= memory_address (mode
, gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, args_addr
,
3241 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (mode
, addr
), x
);
3243 if (current_function_check_memory_usage
&& ! in_check_memory_usage
)
3245 in_check_memory_usage
= 1;
3247 target
= get_push_address (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
));
3249 if (GET_CODE (x
) == MEM
&& type
&& AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type
))
3250 emit_library_call (chkr_copy_bitmap_libfunc
, 1, VOIDmode
, 3,
3253 GEN_INT (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
)),
3254 TYPE_MODE (sizetype
));
3256 emit_library_call (chkr_set_right_libfunc
, 1, VOIDmode
, 3,
3258 GEN_INT (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
)),
3259 TYPE_MODE (sizetype
),
3260 GEN_INT (MEMORY_USE_RW
),
3261 TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node
));
3262 in_check_memory_usage
= 0;
3267 /* If part should go in registers, copy that part
3268 into the appropriate registers. Do this now, at the end,
3269 since mem-to-mem copies above may do function calls. */
3270 if (partial
> 0 && reg
!= 0)
3272 /* Handle calls that pass values in multiple non-contiguous locations.
3273 The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
3274 if (GET_CODE (reg
) == PARALLEL
)
3275 emit_group_load (reg
, x
, -1, align
); /* ??? size? */
3277 move_block_to_reg (REGNO (reg
), x
, partial
, mode
);
3280 if (extra
&& args_addr
== 0 && where_pad
== stack_direction
)
3281 anti_adjust_stack (GEN_INT (extra
));
3284 anti_adjust_stack (alignment_pad
);
3287 /* Expand an assignment that stores the value of FROM into TO.
3288 If WANT_VALUE is nonzero, return an rtx for the value of TO.
3289 (This may contain a QUEUED rtx;
3290 if the value is constant, this rtx is a constant.)
3291 Otherwise, the returned value is NULL_RTX.
3293 SUGGEST_REG is no longer actually used.
3294 It used to mean, copy the value through a register
3295 and return that register, if that is possible.
3296 We now use WANT_VALUE to decide whether to do this. */
3299 expand_assignment (to
, from
, want_value
, suggest_reg
)
3302 int suggest_reg ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED
;
3304 register rtx to_rtx
= 0;
3307 /* Don't crash if the lhs of the assignment was erroneous. */
3309 if (TREE_CODE (to
) == ERROR_MARK
)
3311 result
= expand_expr (from
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
3312 return want_value
? result
: NULL_RTX
;
3315 /* Assignment of a structure component needs special treatment
3316 if the structure component's rtx is not simply a MEM.
3317 Assignment of an array element at a constant index, and assignment of
3318 an array element in an unaligned packed structure field, has the same
3321 if (TREE_CODE (to
) == COMPONENT_REF
|| TREE_CODE (to
) == BIT_FIELD_REF
3322 || TREE_CODE (to
) == ARRAY_REF
)
3324 enum machine_mode mode1
;
3331 unsigned int alignment
;
3334 tem
= get_inner_reference (to
, &bitsize
, &bitpos
, &offset
, &mode1
,
3335 &unsignedp
, &volatilep
, &alignment
);
3337 /* If we are going to use store_bit_field and extract_bit_field,
3338 make sure to_rtx will be safe for multiple use. */
3340 if (mode1
== VOIDmode
&& want_value
)
3341 tem
= stabilize_reference (tem
);
3343 to_rtx
= expand_expr (tem
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_MEMORY_USE_DONT
);
3346 rtx offset_rtx
= expand_expr (offset
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
3348 if (GET_CODE (to_rtx
) != MEM
)
3351 if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx
) != ptr_mode
)
3353 #ifdef POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
3354 offset_rtx
= convert_memory_address (ptr_mode
, offset_rtx
);
3356 offset_rtx
= convert_to_mode (ptr_mode
, offset_rtx
, 0);
3360 /* A constant address in TO_RTX can have VOIDmode, we must not try
3361 to call force_reg for that case. Avoid that case. */
3362 if (GET_CODE (to_rtx
) == MEM
3363 && GET_MODE (to_rtx
) == BLKmode
3364 && GET_MODE (XEXP (to_rtx
, 0)) != VOIDmode
3366 && (bitpos
% bitsize
) == 0
3367 && (bitsize
% GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1
)) == 0
3368 && (alignment
* BITS_PER_UNIT
) == GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1
))
3370 rtx temp
= change_address (to_rtx
, mode1
,
3371 plus_constant (XEXP (to_rtx
, 0),
3374 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (temp
, 0)) == REG
)
3377 to_rtx
= change_address (to_rtx
, mode1
,
3378 force_reg (GET_MODE (XEXP (temp
, 0)),
3383 to_rtx
= change_address (to_rtx
, VOIDmode
,
3384 gen_rtx_PLUS (ptr_mode
, XEXP (to_rtx
, 0),
3385 force_reg (ptr_mode
,
3391 if (GET_CODE (to_rtx
) == MEM
)
3393 /* When the offset is zero, to_rtx is the address of the
3394 structure we are storing into, and hence may be shared.
3395 We must make a new MEM before setting the volatile bit. */
3397 to_rtx
= copy_rtx (to_rtx
);
3399 MEM_VOLATILE_P (to_rtx
) = 1;
3401 #if 0 /* This was turned off because, when a field is volatile
3402 in an object which is not volatile, the object may be in a register,
3403 and then we would abort over here. */
3409 if (TREE_CODE (to
) == COMPONENT_REF
3410 && TREE_READONLY (TREE_OPERAND (to
, 1)))
3413 to_rtx
= copy_rtx (to_rtx
);
3415 RTX_UNCHANGING_P (to_rtx
) = 1;
3418 /* Check the access. */
3419 if (current_function_check_memory_usage
&& GET_CODE (to_rtx
) == MEM
)
3424 enum machine_mode best_mode
;
3426 best_mode
= get_best_mode (bitsize
, bitpos
,
3427 TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (tem
)),
3429 if (best_mode
== VOIDmode
)
3432 best_mode_size
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (best_mode
);
3433 to_addr
= plus_constant (XEXP (to_rtx
, 0), (bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
));
3434 size
= CEIL ((bitpos
% best_mode_size
) + bitsize
, best_mode_size
);
3435 size
*= GET_MODE_SIZE (best_mode
);
3437 /* Check the access right of the pointer. */
3439 emit_library_call (chkr_check_addr_libfunc
, 1, VOIDmode
, 3,
3441 GEN_INT (size
), TYPE_MODE (sizetype
),
3442 GEN_INT (MEMORY_USE_WO
),
3443 TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node
));
3446 result
= store_field (to_rtx
, bitsize
, bitpos
, mode1
, from
,
3448 /* Spurious cast makes HPUX compiler happy. */
3449 ? (enum machine_mode
) TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (to
))
3452 /* Required alignment of containing datum. */
3454 int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (tem
)),
3455 get_alias_set (to
));
3456 preserve_temp_slots (result
);
3460 /* If the value is meaningful, convert RESULT to the proper mode.
3461 Otherwise, return nothing. */
3462 return (want_value
? convert_modes (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (to
)),
3463 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (from
)),
3465 TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (to
)))
3469 /* If the rhs is a function call and its value is not an aggregate,
3470 call the function before we start to compute the lhs.
3471 This is needed for correct code for cases such as
3472 val = setjmp (buf) on machines where reference to val
3473 requires loading up part of an address in a separate insn.
3475 Don't do this if TO is a VAR_DECL whose DECL_RTL is REG since it might be
3476 a promoted variable where the zero- or sign- extension needs to be done.
3477 Handling this in the normal way is safe because no computation is done
3479 if (TREE_CODE (from
) == CALL_EXPR
&& ! aggregate_value_p (from
)
3480 && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (from
))) == INTEGER_CST
3481 && ! (TREE_CODE (to
) == VAR_DECL
&& GET_CODE (DECL_RTL (to
)) == REG
))
3486 value
= expand_expr (from
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
3488 to_rtx
= expand_expr (to
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_MEMORY_USE_WO
);
3490 /* Handle calls that return values in multiple non-contiguous locations.
3491 The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
3492 if (GET_CODE (to_rtx
) == PARALLEL
)
3493 emit_group_load (to_rtx
, value
, int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (from
)),
3494 TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (from
)) / BITS_PER_UNIT
);
3495 else if (GET_MODE (to_rtx
) == BLKmode
)
3496 emit_block_move (to_rtx
, value
, expr_size (from
),
3497 TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (from
)) / BITS_PER_UNIT
);
3500 #ifdef POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
3501 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (to
)) == REFERENCE_TYPE
3502 || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (to
)) == POINTER_TYPE
)
3503 value
= convert_memory_address (GET_MODE (to_rtx
), value
);
3505 emit_move_insn (to_rtx
, value
);
3507 preserve_temp_slots (to_rtx
);
3510 return want_value
? to_rtx
: NULL_RTX
;
3513 /* Ordinary treatment. Expand TO to get a REG or MEM rtx.
3514 Don't re-expand if it was expanded already (in COMPONENT_REF case). */
3518 to_rtx
= expand_expr (to
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_MEMORY_USE_WO
);
3519 if (GET_CODE (to_rtx
) == MEM
)
3520 MEM_ALIAS_SET (to_rtx
) = get_alias_set (to
);
3523 /* Don't move directly into a return register. */
3524 if (TREE_CODE (to
) == RESULT_DECL
3525 && (GET_CODE (to_rtx
) == REG
|| GET_CODE (to_rtx
) == PARALLEL
))
3530 temp
= expand_expr (from
, 0, GET_MODE (to_rtx
), 0);
3532 if (GET_CODE (to_rtx
) == PARALLEL
)
3533 emit_group_load (to_rtx
, temp
, int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (from
)),
3534 TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (from
)) / BITS_PER_UNIT
);
3536 emit_move_insn (to_rtx
, temp
);
3538 preserve_temp_slots (to_rtx
);
3541 return want_value
? to_rtx
: NULL_RTX
;
3544 /* In case we are returning the contents of an object which overlaps
3545 the place the value is being stored, use a safe function when copying
3546 a value through a pointer into a structure value return block. */
3547 if (TREE_CODE (to
) == RESULT_DECL
&& TREE_CODE (from
) == INDIRECT_REF
3548 && current_function_returns_struct
3549 && !current_function_returns_pcc_struct
)
3554 size
= expr_size (from
);
3555 from_rtx
= expand_expr (from
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
,
3556 EXPAND_MEMORY_USE_DONT
);
3558 /* Copy the rights of the bitmap. */
3559 if (current_function_check_memory_usage
)
3560 emit_library_call (chkr_copy_bitmap_libfunc
, 1, VOIDmode
, 3,
3561 XEXP (to_rtx
, 0), Pmode
,
3562 XEXP (from_rtx
, 0), Pmode
,
3563 convert_to_mode (TYPE_MODE (sizetype
),
3564 size
, TREE_UNSIGNED (sizetype
)),
3565 TYPE_MODE (sizetype
));
3567 #ifdef TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
3568 emit_library_call (memcpy_libfunc
, 0,
3569 VOIDmode
, 3, XEXP (to_rtx
, 0), Pmode
,
3570 XEXP (from_rtx
, 0), Pmode
,
3571 convert_to_mode (TYPE_MODE (sizetype
),
3572 size
, TREE_UNSIGNED (sizetype
)),
3573 TYPE_MODE (sizetype
));
3575 emit_library_call (bcopy_libfunc
, 0,
3576 VOIDmode
, 3, XEXP (from_rtx
, 0), Pmode
,
3577 XEXP (to_rtx
, 0), Pmode
,
3578 convert_to_mode (TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node
),
3579 size
, TREE_UNSIGNED (integer_type_node
)),
3580 TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node
));
3583 preserve_temp_slots (to_rtx
);
3586 return want_value
? to_rtx
: NULL_RTX
;
3589 /* Compute FROM and store the value in the rtx we got. */
3592 result
= store_expr (from
, to_rtx
, want_value
);
3593 preserve_temp_slots (result
);
3596 return want_value
? result
: NULL_RTX
;
3599 /* Generate code for computing expression EXP,
3600 and storing the value into TARGET.
3601 TARGET may contain a QUEUED rtx.
3603 If WANT_VALUE is nonzero, return a copy of the value
3604 not in TARGET, so that we can be sure to use the proper
3605 value in a containing expression even if TARGET has something
3606 else stored in it. If possible, we copy the value through a pseudo
3607 and return that pseudo. Or, if the value is constant, we try to
3608 return the constant. In some cases, we return a pseudo
3609 copied *from* TARGET.
3611 If the mode is BLKmode then we may return TARGET itself.
3612 It turns out that in BLKmode it doesn't cause a problem.
3613 because C has no operators that could combine two different
3614 assignments into the same BLKmode object with different values
3615 with no sequence point. Will other languages need this to
3618 If WANT_VALUE is 0, we return NULL, to make sure
3619 to catch quickly any cases where the caller uses the value
3620 and fails to set WANT_VALUE. */
3623 store_expr (exp
, target
, want_value
)
3625 register rtx target
;
3629 int dont_return_target
= 0;
3631 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == COMPOUND_EXPR
)
3633 /* Perform first part of compound expression, then assign from second
3635 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, 0);
3637 return store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), target
, want_value
);
3639 else if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == COND_EXPR
&& GET_MODE (target
) == BLKmode
)
3641 /* For conditional expression, get safe form of the target. Then
3642 test the condition, doing the appropriate assignment on either
3643 side. This avoids the creation of unnecessary temporaries.
3644 For non-BLKmode, it is more efficient not to do this. */
3646 rtx lab1
= gen_label_rtx (), lab2
= gen_label_rtx ();
3649 target
= protect_from_queue (target
, 1);
3651 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
3653 jumpifnot (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), lab1
);
3654 start_cleanup_deferral ();
3655 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), target
, 0);
3656 end_cleanup_deferral ();
3658 emit_jump_insn (gen_jump (lab2
));
3661 start_cleanup_deferral ();
3662 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2), target
, 0);
3663 end_cleanup_deferral ();
3668 return want_value
? target
: NULL_RTX
;
3670 else if (queued_subexp_p (target
))
3671 /* If target contains a postincrement, let's not risk
3672 using it as the place to generate the rhs. */
3674 if (GET_MODE (target
) != BLKmode
&& GET_MODE (target
) != VOIDmode
)
3676 /* Expand EXP into a new pseudo. */
3677 temp
= gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (target
));
3678 temp
= expand_expr (exp
, temp
, GET_MODE (target
), 0);
3681 temp
= expand_expr (exp
, NULL_RTX
, GET_MODE (target
), 0);
3683 /* If target is volatile, ANSI requires accessing the value
3684 *from* the target, if it is accessed. So make that happen.
3685 In no case return the target itself. */
3686 if (! MEM_VOLATILE_P (target
) && want_value
)
3687 dont_return_target
= 1;
3689 else if (want_value
&& GET_CODE (target
) == MEM
&& ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (target
)
3690 && GET_MODE (target
) != BLKmode
)
3691 /* If target is in memory and caller wants value in a register instead,
3692 arrange that. Pass TARGET as target for expand_expr so that,
3693 if EXP is another assignment, WANT_VALUE will be nonzero for it.
3694 We know expand_expr will not use the target in that case.
3695 Don't do this if TARGET is volatile because we are supposed
3696 to write it and then read it. */
3698 temp
= expand_expr (exp
, target
, GET_MODE (target
), 0);
3699 if (GET_MODE (temp
) != BLKmode
&& GET_MODE (temp
) != VOIDmode
)
3700 temp
= copy_to_reg (temp
);
3701 dont_return_target
= 1;
3703 else if (GET_CODE (target
) == SUBREG
&& SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (target
))
3704 /* If this is an scalar in a register that is stored in a wider mode
3705 than the declared mode, compute the result into its declared mode
3706 and then convert to the wider mode. Our value is the computed
3709 /* If we don't want a value, we can do the conversion inside EXP,
3710 which will often result in some optimizations. Do the conversion
3711 in two steps: first change the signedness, if needed, then
3712 the extend. But don't do this if the type of EXP is a subtype
3713 of something else since then the conversion might involve
3714 more than just converting modes. */
3715 if (! want_value
&& INTEGRAL_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp
))
3716 && TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)) == 0)
3718 if (TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp
))
3719 != SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target
))
3722 (signed_or_unsigned_type (SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target
),
3726 exp
= convert (type_for_mode (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (target
)),
3727 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target
)),
3731 temp
= expand_expr (exp
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
3733 /* If TEMP is a volatile MEM and we want a result value, make
3734 the access now so it gets done only once. Likewise if
3735 it contains TARGET. */
3736 if (GET_CODE (temp
) == MEM
&& want_value
3737 && (MEM_VOLATILE_P (temp
)
3738 || reg_mentioned_p (SUBREG_REG (target
), XEXP (temp
, 0))))
3739 temp
= copy_to_reg (temp
);
3741 /* If TEMP is a VOIDmode constant, use convert_modes to make
3742 sure that we properly convert it. */
3743 if (CONSTANT_P (temp
) && GET_MODE (temp
) == VOIDmode
)
3744 temp
= convert_modes (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (target
)),
3745 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)), temp
,
3746 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target
));
3748 convert_move (SUBREG_REG (target
), temp
,
3749 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target
));
3751 /* If we promoted a constant, change the mode back down to match
3752 target. Otherwise, the caller might get confused by a result whose
3753 mode is larger than expected. */
3755 if (want_value
&& GET_MODE (temp
) != GET_MODE (target
)
3756 && GET_MODE (temp
) != VOIDmode
)
3758 temp
= gen_rtx_SUBREG (GET_MODE (target
), temp
, 0);
3759 SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (temp
) = 1;
3760 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (temp
)
3761 = SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (target
);
3764 return want_value
? temp
: NULL_RTX
;
3768 temp
= expand_expr (exp
, target
, GET_MODE (target
), 0);
3769 /* Return TARGET if it's a specified hardware register.
3770 If TARGET is a volatile mem ref, either return TARGET
3771 or return a reg copied *from* TARGET; ANSI requires this.
3773 Otherwise, if TEMP is not TARGET, return TEMP
3774 if it is constant (for efficiency),
3775 or if we really want the correct value. */
3776 if (!(target
&& GET_CODE (target
) == REG
3777 && REGNO (target
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
3778 && !(GET_CODE (target
) == MEM
&& MEM_VOLATILE_P (target
))
3779 && ! rtx_equal_p (temp
, target
)
3780 && (CONSTANT_P (temp
) || want_value
))
3781 dont_return_target
= 1;
3784 /* If TEMP is a VOIDmode constant and the mode of the type of EXP is not
3785 the same as that of TARGET, adjust the constant. This is needed, for
3786 example, in case it is a CONST_DOUBLE and we want only a word-sized
3788 if (CONSTANT_P (temp
) && GET_MODE (temp
) == VOIDmode
3789 && TREE_CODE (exp
) != ERROR_MARK
3790 && GET_MODE (target
) != TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))
3791 temp
= convert_modes (GET_MODE (target
), TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)),
3792 temp
, TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
3794 if (current_function_check_memory_usage
3795 && GET_CODE (target
) == MEM
3796 && AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))
3798 if (GET_CODE (temp
) == MEM
)
3799 emit_library_call (chkr_copy_bitmap_libfunc
, 1, VOIDmode
, 3,
3800 XEXP (target
, 0), Pmode
,
3801 XEXP (temp
, 0), Pmode
,
3802 expr_size (exp
), TYPE_MODE (sizetype
));
3804 emit_library_call (chkr_check_addr_libfunc
, 1, VOIDmode
, 3,
3805 XEXP (target
, 0), Pmode
,
3806 expr_size (exp
), TYPE_MODE (sizetype
),
3807 GEN_INT (MEMORY_USE_WO
),
3808 TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node
));
3811 /* If value was not generated in the target, store it there.
3812 Convert the value to TARGET's type first if nec. */
3813 /* If TEMP and TARGET compare equal according to rtx_equal_p, but
3814 one or both of them are volatile memory refs, we have to distinguish
3816 - expand_expr has used TARGET. In this case, we must not generate
3817 another copy. This can be detected by TARGET being equal according
3819 - expand_expr has not used TARGET - that means that the source just
3820 happens to have the same RTX form. Since temp will have been created
3821 by expand_expr, it will compare unequal according to == .
3822 We must generate a copy in this case, to reach the correct number
3823 of volatile memory references. */
3825 if ((! rtx_equal_p (temp
, target
)
3826 || (temp
!= target
&& (side_effects_p (temp
)
3827 || side_effects_p (target
))))
3828 && TREE_CODE (exp
) != ERROR_MARK
)
3830 target
= protect_from_queue (target
, 1);
3831 if (GET_MODE (temp
) != GET_MODE (target
)
3832 && GET_MODE (temp
) != VOIDmode
)
3834 int unsignedp
= TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
3835 if (dont_return_target
)
3837 /* In this case, we will return TEMP,
3838 so make sure it has the proper mode.
3839 But don't forget to store the value into TARGET. */
3840 temp
= convert_to_mode (GET_MODE (target
), temp
, unsignedp
);
3841 emit_move_insn (target
, temp
);
3844 convert_move (target
, temp
, unsignedp
);
3847 else if (GET_MODE (temp
) == BLKmode
&& TREE_CODE (exp
) == STRING_CST
)
3849 /* Handle copying a string constant into an array.
3850 The string constant may be shorter than the array.
3851 So copy just the string's actual length, and clear the rest. */
3855 /* Get the size of the data type of the string,
3856 which is actually the size of the target. */
3857 size
= expr_size (exp
);
3858 if (GET_CODE (size
) == CONST_INT
3859 && INTVAL (size
) < TREE_STRING_LENGTH (exp
))
3860 emit_block_move (target
, temp
, size
,
3861 TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp
)) / BITS_PER_UNIT
);
3864 /* Compute the size of the data to copy from the string. */
3866 = size_binop (MIN_EXPR
,
3867 make_tree (sizetype
, size
),
3868 size_int (TREE_STRING_LENGTH (exp
)));
3869 rtx copy_size_rtx
= expand_expr (copy_size
, NULL_RTX
,
3873 /* Copy that much. */
3874 emit_block_move (target
, temp
, copy_size_rtx
,
3875 TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp
)) / BITS_PER_UNIT
);
3877 /* Figure out how much is left in TARGET that we have to clear.
3878 Do all calculations in ptr_mode. */
3880 addr
= XEXP (target
, 0);
3881 addr
= convert_modes (ptr_mode
, Pmode
, addr
, 1);
3883 if (GET_CODE (copy_size_rtx
) == CONST_INT
)
3885 addr
= plus_constant (addr
, TREE_STRING_LENGTH (exp
));
3886 size
= plus_constant (size
, - TREE_STRING_LENGTH (exp
));
3890 addr
= force_reg (ptr_mode
, addr
);
3891 addr
= expand_binop (ptr_mode
, add_optab
, addr
,
3892 copy_size_rtx
, NULL_RTX
, 0,
3895 size
= expand_binop (ptr_mode
, sub_optab
, size
,
3896 copy_size_rtx
, NULL_RTX
, 0,
3899 label
= gen_label_rtx ();
3900 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (size
, const0_rtx
, LT
, NULL_RTX
,
3901 GET_MODE (size
), 0, 0, label
);
3904 if (size
!= const0_rtx
)
3906 /* Be sure we can write on ADDR. */
3907 if (current_function_check_memory_usage
)
3908 emit_library_call (chkr_check_addr_libfunc
, 1, VOIDmode
, 3,
3910 size
, TYPE_MODE (sizetype
),
3911 GEN_INT (MEMORY_USE_WO
),
3912 TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node
));
3913 #ifdef TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
3914 emit_library_call (memset_libfunc
, 0, VOIDmode
, 3,
3916 const0_rtx
, TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node
),
3917 convert_to_mode (TYPE_MODE (sizetype
),
3919 TREE_UNSIGNED (sizetype
)),
3920 TYPE_MODE (sizetype
));
3922 emit_library_call (bzero_libfunc
, 0, VOIDmode
, 2,
3924 convert_to_mode (TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node
),
3926 TREE_UNSIGNED (integer_type_node
)),
3927 TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node
));
3935 /* Handle calls that return values in multiple non-contiguous locations.
3936 The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
3937 else if (GET_CODE (target
) == PARALLEL
)
3938 emit_group_load (target
, temp
, int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (exp
)),
3939 TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp
)) / BITS_PER_UNIT
);
3940 else if (GET_MODE (temp
) == BLKmode
)
3941 emit_block_move (target
, temp
, expr_size (exp
),
3942 TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp
)) / BITS_PER_UNIT
);
3944 emit_move_insn (target
, temp
);
3947 /* If we don't want a value, return NULL_RTX. */
3951 /* If we are supposed to return TEMP, do so as long as it isn't a MEM.
3952 ??? The latter test doesn't seem to make sense. */
3953 else if (dont_return_target
&& GET_CODE (temp
) != MEM
)
3956 /* Return TARGET itself if it is a hard register. */
3957 else if (want_value
&& GET_MODE (target
) != BLKmode
3958 && ! (GET_CODE (target
) == REG
3959 && REGNO (target
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
))
3960 return copy_to_reg (target
);
3966 /* Return 1 if EXP just contains zeros. */
3974 switch (TREE_CODE (exp
))
3978 case NON_LVALUE_EXPR
:
3979 return is_zeros_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0));
3982 return TREE_INT_CST_LOW (exp
) == 0 && TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (exp
) == 0;
3986 is_zeros_p (TREE_REALPART (exp
)) && is_zeros_p (TREE_IMAGPART (exp
));
3989 return REAL_VALUES_IDENTICAL (TREE_REAL_CST (exp
), dconst0
);
3992 if (TREE_TYPE (exp
) && TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)) == SET_TYPE
)
3993 return CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
) == NULL_TREE
;
3994 for (elt
= CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
); elt
; elt
= TREE_CHAIN (elt
))
3995 if (! is_zeros_p (TREE_VALUE (elt
)))
4005 /* Return 1 if EXP contains mostly (3/4) zeros. */
4008 mostly_zeros_p (exp
)
4011 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == CONSTRUCTOR
)
4013 int elts
= 0, zeros
= 0;
4014 tree elt
= CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
);
4015 if (TREE_TYPE (exp
) && TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)) == SET_TYPE
)
4017 /* If there are no ranges of true bits, it is all zero. */
4018 return elt
== NULL_TREE
;
4020 for (; elt
; elt
= TREE_CHAIN (elt
))
4022 /* We do not handle the case where the index is a RANGE_EXPR,
4023 so the statistic will be somewhat inaccurate.
4024 We do make a more accurate count in store_constructor itself,
4025 so since this function is only used for nested array elements,
4026 this should be close enough. */
4027 if (mostly_zeros_p (TREE_VALUE (elt
)))
4032 return 4 * zeros
>= 3 * elts
;
4035 return is_zeros_p (exp
);
4038 /* Helper function for store_constructor.
4039 TARGET, BITSIZE, BITPOS, MODE, EXP are as for store_field.
4040 TYPE is the type of the CONSTRUCTOR, not the element type.
4041 ALIGN and CLEARED are as for store_constructor.
4043 This provides a recursive shortcut back to store_constructor when it isn't
4044 necessary to go through store_field. This is so that we can pass through
4045 the cleared field to let store_constructor know that we may not have to
4046 clear a substructure if the outer structure has already been cleared. */
4049 store_constructor_field (target
, bitsize
, bitpos
,
4050 mode
, exp
, type
, align
, cleared
)
4052 int bitsize
, bitpos
;
4053 enum machine_mode mode
;
4058 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == CONSTRUCTOR
4059 && bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
== 0
4060 /* If we have a non-zero bitpos for a register target, then we just
4061 let store_field do the bitfield handling. This is unlikely to
4062 generate unnecessary clear instructions anyways. */
4063 && (bitpos
== 0 || GET_CODE (target
) == MEM
))
4067 = change_address (target
,
4068 GET_MODE (target
) == BLKmode
4070 % GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (GET_MODE (target
)))
4071 ? BLKmode
: VOIDmode
,
4072 plus_constant (XEXP (target
, 0),
4073 bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
));
4074 store_constructor (exp
, target
, align
, cleared
, bitsize
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
4077 store_field (target
, bitsize
, bitpos
, mode
, exp
, VOIDmode
, 0,
4078 (align
+ BITS_PER_UNIT
- 1) / BITS_PER_UNIT
,
4079 int_size_in_bytes (type
), 0);
4082 /* Store the value of constructor EXP into the rtx TARGET.
4083 TARGET is either a REG or a MEM.
4084 ALIGN is the maximum known alignment for TARGET, in bits.
4085 CLEARED is true if TARGET is known to have been zero'd.
4086 SIZE is the number of bytes of TARGET we are allowed to modify: this
4087 may not be the same as the size of EXP if we are assigning to a field
4088 which has been packed to exclude padding bits. */
4091 store_constructor (exp
, target
, align
, cleared
, size
)
4098 tree type
= TREE_TYPE (exp
);
4099 #ifdef WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
4100 rtx exp_size
= expr_size (exp
);
4103 /* We know our target cannot conflict, since safe_from_p has been called. */
4105 /* Don't try copying piece by piece into a hard register
4106 since that is vulnerable to being clobbered by EXP.
4107 Instead, construct in a pseudo register and then copy it all. */
4108 if (GET_CODE (target
) == REG
&& REGNO (target
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
4110 rtx temp
= gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (target
));
4111 store_constructor (exp
, temp
, align
, cleared
, size
);
4112 emit_move_insn (target
, temp
);
4117 if (TREE_CODE (type
) == RECORD_TYPE
|| TREE_CODE (type
) == UNION_TYPE
4118 || TREE_CODE (type
) == QUAL_UNION_TYPE
)
4122 /* Inform later passes that the whole union value is dead. */
4123 if ((TREE_CODE (type
) == UNION_TYPE
4124 || TREE_CODE (type
) == QUAL_UNION_TYPE
)
4127 emit_insn (gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode
, target
));
4129 /* If the constructor is empty, clear the union. */
4130 if (! CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
) && ! cleared
)
4131 clear_storage (target
, expr_size (exp
),
4132 TYPE_ALIGN (type
) / BITS_PER_UNIT
);
4135 /* If we are building a static constructor into a register,
4136 set the initial value as zero so we can fold the value into
4137 a constant. But if more than one register is involved,
4138 this probably loses. */
4139 else if (GET_CODE (target
) == REG
&& TREE_STATIC (exp
)
4140 && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (target
)) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
)
4143 emit_move_insn (target
, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (target
)));
4148 /* If the constructor has fewer fields than the structure
4149 or if we are initializing the structure to mostly zeros,
4150 clear the whole structure first. */
4152 && ((list_length (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
))
4153 != list_length (TYPE_FIELDS (type
)))
4154 || mostly_zeros_p (exp
)))
4157 clear_storage (target
, GEN_INT (size
),
4158 (align
+ BITS_PER_UNIT
- 1) / BITS_PER_UNIT
);
4163 /* Inform later passes that the old value is dead. */
4164 emit_insn (gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode
, target
));
4166 /* Store each element of the constructor into
4167 the corresponding field of TARGET. */
4169 for (elt
= CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
); elt
; elt
= TREE_CHAIN (elt
))
4171 register tree field
= TREE_PURPOSE (elt
);
4172 #ifdef WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
4173 tree value
= TREE_VALUE (elt
);
4175 register enum machine_mode mode
;
4179 tree pos
, constant
= 0, offset
= 0;
4180 rtx to_rtx
= target
;
4182 /* Just ignore missing fields.
4183 We cleared the whole structure, above,
4184 if any fields are missing. */
4188 if (cleared
&& is_zeros_p (TREE_VALUE (elt
)))
4191 if (TREE_CODE (DECL_SIZE (field
)) == INTEGER_CST
)
4192 bitsize
= TREE_INT_CST_LOW (DECL_SIZE (field
));
4196 unsignedp
= TREE_UNSIGNED (field
);
4197 mode
= DECL_MODE (field
);
4198 if (DECL_BIT_FIELD (field
))
4201 pos
= DECL_FIELD_BITPOS (field
);
4202 if (TREE_CODE (pos
) == INTEGER_CST
)
4204 else if (TREE_CODE (pos
) == PLUS_EXPR
4205 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (pos
, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
)
4206 constant
= TREE_OPERAND (pos
, 1), offset
= TREE_OPERAND (pos
, 0);
4211 bitpos
= TREE_INT_CST_LOW (constant
);
4217 if (contains_placeholder_p (offset
))
4218 offset
= build (WITH_RECORD_EXPR
, bitsizetype
,
4219 offset
, make_tree (TREE_TYPE (exp
), target
));
4221 offset
= size_binop (EXACT_DIV_EXPR
, offset
,
4222 bitsize_int (BITS_PER_UNIT
));
4223 offset
= convert (sizetype
, offset
);
4225 offset_rtx
= expand_expr (offset
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
4226 if (GET_CODE (to_rtx
) != MEM
)
4229 if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx
) != ptr_mode
)
4231 #ifdef POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
4232 offset_rtx
= convert_memory_address (ptr_mode
, offset_rtx
);
4234 offset_rtx
= convert_to_mode (ptr_mode
, offset_rtx
, 0);
4239 = change_address (to_rtx
, VOIDmode
,
4240 gen_rtx_PLUS (ptr_mode
, XEXP (to_rtx
, 0),
4241 force_reg (ptr_mode
,
4245 if (TREE_READONLY (field
))
4247 if (GET_CODE (to_rtx
) == MEM
)
4248 to_rtx
= copy_rtx (to_rtx
);
4250 RTX_UNCHANGING_P (to_rtx
) = 1;
4253 #ifdef WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
4254 /* If this initializes a field that is smaller than a word, at the
4255 start of a word, try to widen it to a full word.
4256 This special case allows us to output C++ member function
4257 initializations in a form that the optimizers can understand. */
4259 && GET_CODE (target
) == REG
4260 && bitsize
< BITS_PER_WORD
4261 && bitpos
% BITS_PER_WORD
== 0
4262 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
4263 && TREE_CODE (value
) == INTEGER_CST
4264 && GET_CODE (exp_size
) == CONST_INT
4265 && bitpos
+ BITS_PER_WORD
<= INTVAL (exp_size
) * BITS_PER_UNIT
)
4267 tree type
= TREE_TYPE (value
);
4268 if (TYPE_PRECISION (type
) < BITS_PER_WORD
)
4270 type
= type_for_size (BITS_PER_WORD
, TREE_UNSIGNED (type
));
4271 value
= convert (type
, value
);
4273 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
)
4275 = fold (build (LSHIFT_EXPR
, type
, value
,
4276 build_int_2 (BITS_PER_WORD
- bitsize
, 0)));
4277 bitsize
= BITS_PER_WORD
;
4281 store_constructor_field (to_rtx
, bitsize
, bitpos
, mode
,
4282 TREE_VALUE (elt
), type
,
4284 DECL_ALIGN (TREE_PURPOSE (elt
))),
4288 else if (TREE_CODE (type
) == ARRAY_TYPE
)
4293 tree domain
= TYPE_DOMAIN (type
);
4294 HOST_WIDE_INT minelt
= TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain
));
4295 HOST_WIDE_INT maxelt
= TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain
));
4296 tree elttype
= TREE_TYPE (type
);
4298 /* If the constructor has fewer elements than the array,
4299 clear the whole array first. Similarly if this is
4300 static constructor of a non-BLKmode object. */
4301 if (cleared
|| (GET_CODE (target
) == REG
&& TREE_STATIC (exp
)))
4305 HOST_WIDE_INT count
= 0, zero_count
= 0;
4307 /* This loop is a more accurate version of the loop in
4308 mostly_zeros_p (it handles RANGE_EXPR in an index).
4309 It is also needed to check for missing elements. */
4310 for (elt
= CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
);
4312 elt
= TREE_CHAIN (elt
))
4314 tree index
= TREE_PURPOSE (elt
);
4315 HOST_WIDE_INT this_node_count
;
4316 if (index
!= NULL_TREE
&& TREE_CODE (index
) == RANGE_EXPR
)
4318 tree lo_index
= TREE_OPERAND (index
, 0);
4319 tree hi_index
= TREE_OPERAND (index
, 1);
4320 if (TREE_CODE (lo_index
) != INTEGER_CST
4321 || TREE_CODE (hi_index
) != INTEGER_CST
)
4326 this_node_count
= TREE_INT_CST_LOW (hi_index
)
4327 - TREE_INT_CST_LOW (lo_index
) + 1;
4330 this_node_count
= 1;
4331 count
+= this_node_count
;
4332 if (mostly_zeros_p (TREE_VALUE (elt
)))
4333 zero_count
+= this_node_count
;
4335 /* Clear the entire array first if there are any missing elements,
4336 or if the incidence of zero elements is >= 75%. */
4337 if (count
< maxelt
- minelt
+ 1
4338 || 4 * zero_count
>= 3 * count
)
4341 if (need_to_clear
&& size
> 0)
4344 clear_storage (target
, GEN_INT (size
),
4345 (align
+ BITS_PER_UNIT
- 1) / BITS_PER_UNIT
);
4349 /* Inform later passes that the old value is dead. */
4350 emit_insn (gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode
, target
));
4352 /* Store each element of the constructor into
4353 the corresponding element of TARGET, determined
4354 by counting the elements. */
4355 for (elt
= CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
), i
= 0;
4357 elt
= TREE_CHAIN (elt
), i
++)
4359 register enum machine_mode mode
;
4363 tree value
= TREE_VALUE (elt
);
4364 unsigned int align
= TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (value
));
4365 tree index
= TREE_PURPOSE (elt
);
4366 rtx xtarget
= target
;
4368 if (cleared
&& is_zeros_p (value
))
4371 unsignedp
= TREE_UNSIGNED (elttype
);
4372 mode
= TYPE_MODE (elttype
);
4373 if (mode
== BLKmode
)
4375 if (TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
)) == INTEGER_CST
4376 && TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
)) == 0)
4377 bitsize
= TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
));
4382 bitsize
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
);
4384 if (index
!= NULL_TREE
&& TREE_CODE (index
) == RANGE_EXPR
)
4386 tree lo_index
= TREE_OPERAND (index
, 0);
4387 tree hi_index
= TREE_OPERAND (index
, 1);
4388 rtx index_r
, pos_rtx
, addr
, hi_r
, loop_top
, loop_end
;
4389 struct nesting
*loop
;
4390 HOST_WIDE_INT lo
, hi
, count
;
4393 /* If the range is constant and "small", unroll the loop. */
4394 if (TREE_CODE (lo_index
) == INTEGER_CST
4395 && TREE_CODE (hi_index
) == INTEGER_CST
4396 && (lo
= TREE_INT_CST_LOW (lo_index
),
4397 hi
= TREE_INT_CST_LOW (hi_index
),
4398 count
= hi
- lo
+ 1,
4399 (GET_CODE (target
) != MEM
4401 || (TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
)) == INTEGER_CST
4402 && TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
)) * count
4405 lo
-= minelt
; hi
-= minelt
;
4406 for (; lo
<= hi
; lo
++)
4408 bitpos
= lo
* TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
));
4409 store_constructor_field (target
, bitsize
, bitpos
, mode
,
4410 value
, type
, align
, cleared
);
4415 hi_r
= expand_expr (hi_index
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
4416 loop_top
= gen_label_rtx ();
4417 loop_end
= gen_label_rtx ();
4419 unsignedp
= TREE_UNSIGNED (domain
);
4421 index
= build_decl (VAR_DECL
, NULL_TREE
, domain
);
4423 DECL_RTL (index
) = index_r
4424 = gen_reg_rtx (promote_mode (domain
, DECL_MODE (index
),
4427 if (TREE_CODE (value
) == SAVE_EXPR
4428 && SAVE_EXPR_RTL (value
) == 0)
4430 /* Make sure value gets expanded once before the
4432 expand_expr (value
, const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, 0);
4435 store_expr (lo_index
, index_r
, 0);
4436 loop
= expand_start_loop (0);
4438 /* Assign value to element index. */
4440 = convert (ssizetype
,
4441 fold (build (MINUS_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (index
),
4442 index
, TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain
))));
4443 position
= size_binop (MULT_EXPR
, position
,
4445 TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (elttype
)));
4447 pos_rtx
= expand_expr (position
, 0, VOIDmode
, 0);
4448 addr
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, XEXP (target
, 0), pos_rtx
);
4449 xtarget
= change_address (target
, mode
, addr
);
4450 if (TREE_CODE (value
) == CONSTRUCTOR
)
4451 store_constructor (value
, xtarget
, align
, cleared
,
4452 bitsize
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
);
4454 store_expr (value
, xtarget
, 0);
4456 expand_exit_loop_if_false (loop
,
4457 build (LT_EXPR
, integer_type_node
,
4460 expand_increment (build (PREINCREMENT_EXPR
,
4462 index
, integer_one_node
), 0, 0);
4464 emit_label (loop_end
);
4467 else if ((index
!= 0 && TREE_CODE (index
) != INTEGER_CST
)
4468 || TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
)) != INTEGER_CST
)
4474 index
= ssize_int (1);
4477 index
= convert (ssizetype
,
4478 fold (build (MINUS_EXPR
, index
,
4479 TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain
))));
4480 position
= size_binop (MULT_EXPR
, index
,
4482 TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (elttype
)));
4483 pos_rtx
= expand_expr (position
, 0, VOIDmode
, 0);
4484 addr
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
, XEXP (target
, 0), pos_rtx
);
4485 xtarget
= change_address (target
, mode
, addr
);
4486 store_expr (value
, xtarget
, 0);
4491 bitpos
= ((TREE_INT_CST_LOW (index
) - minelt
)
4492 * TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
)));
4494 bitpos
= (i
* TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TYPE_SIZE (elttype
)));
4495 store_constructor_field (target
, bitsize
, bitpos
, mode
, value
,
4496 type
, align
, cleared
);
4500 /* set constructor assignments */
4501 else if (TREE_CODE (type
) == SET_TYPE
)
4503 tree elt
= CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
);
4504 int nbytes
= int_size_in_bytes (type
), nbits
;
4505 tree domain
= TYPE_DOMAIN (type
);
4506 tree domain_min
, domain_max
, bitlength
;
4508 /* The default implementation strategy is to extract the constant
4509 parts of the constructor, use that to initialize the target,
4510 and then "or" in whatever non-constant ranges we need in addition.
4512 If a large set is all zero or all ones, it is
4513 probably better to set it using memset (if available) or bzero.
4514 Also, if a large set has just a single range, it may also be
4515 better to first clear all the first clear the set (using
4516 bzero/memset), and set the bits we want. */
4518 /* Check for all zeros. */
4519 if (elt
== NULL_TREE
&& size
> 0)
4522 clear_storage (target
, GEN_INT (size
),
4523 TYPE_ALIGN (type
) / BITS_PER_UNIT
);
4527 domain_min
= convert (sizetype
, TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain
));
4528 domain_max
= convert (sizetype
, TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain
));
4529 bitlength
= size_binop (PLUS_EXPR
,
4530 size_diffop (domain_max
, domain_min
),
4533 if (nbytes
< 0 || TREE_CODE (bitlength
) != INTEGER_CST
)
4535 nbits
= TREE_INT_CST_LOW (bitlength
);
4537 /* For "small" sets, or "medium-sized" (up to 32 bytes) sets that
4538 are "complicated" (more than one range), initialize (the
4539 constant parts) by copying from a constant. */
4540 if (GET_MODE (target
) != BLKmode
|| nbits
<= 2 * BITS_PER_WORD
4541 || (nbytes
<= 32 && TREE_CHAIN (elt
) != NULL_TREE
))
4543 int set_word_size
= TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
4544 enum machine_mode mode
= mode_for_size (set_word_size
, MODE_INT
, 1);
4545 char *bit_buffer
= (char *) alloca (nbits
);
4546 HOST_WIDE_INT word
= 0;
4549 int offset
= 0; /* In bytes from beginning of set. */
4550 elt
= get_set_constructor_bits (exp
, bit_buffer
, nbits
);
4553 if (bit_buffer
[ibit
])
4555 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
)
4556 word
|= (1 << (set_word_size
- 1 - bit_pos
));
4558 word
|= 1 << bit_pos
;
4561 if (bit_pos
>= set_word_size
|| ibit
== nbits
)
4563 if (word
!= 0 || ! cleared
)
4565 rtx datum
= GEN_INT (word
);
4567 /* The assumption here is that it is safe to use
4568 XEXP if the set is multi-word, but not if
4569 it's single-word. */
4570 if (GET_CODE (target
) == MEM
)
4572 to_rtx
= plus_constant (XEXP (target
, 0), offset
);
4573 to_rtx
= change_address (target
, mode
, to_rtx
);
4575 else if (offset
== 0)
4579 emit_move_insn (to_rtx
, datum
);
4585 offset
+= set_word_size
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
;
4591 /* Don't bother clearing storage if the set is all ones. */
4592 if (TREE_CHAIN (elt
) != NULL_TREE
4593 || (TREE_PURPOSE (elt
) == NULL_TREE
4595 : (TREE_CODE (TREE_VALUE (elt
)) != INTEGER_CST
4596 || TREE_CODE (TREE_PURPOSE (elt
)) != INTEGER_CST
4597 || (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_VALUE (elt
))
4598 - TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_PURPOSE (elt
)) + 1
4600 clear_storage (target
, expr_size (exp
),
4601 TYPE_ALIGN (type
) / BITS_PER_UNIT
);
4604 for (; elt
!= NULL_TREE
; elt
= TREE_CHAIN (elt
))
4606 /* start of range of element or NULL */
4607 tree startbit
= TREE_PURPOSE (elt
);
4608 /* end of range of element, or element value */
4609 tree endbit
= TREE_VALUE (elt
);
4610 #ifdef TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
4611 HOST_WIDE_INT startb
, endb
;
4613 rtx bitlength_rtx
, startbit_rtx
, endbit_rtx
, targetx
;
4615 bitlength_rtx
= expand_expr (bitlength
,
4616 NULL_RTX
, MEM
, EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
);
4618 /* handle non-range tuple element like [ expr ] */
4619 if (startbit
== NULL_TREE
)
4621 startbit
= save_expr (endbit
);
4624 startbit
= convert (sizetype
, startbit
);
4625 endbit
= convert (sizetype
, endbit
);
4626 if (! integer_zerop (domain_min
))
4628 startbit
= size_binop (MINUS_EXPR
, startbit
, domain_min
);
4629 endbit
= size_binop (MINUS_EXPR
, endbit
, domain_min
);
4631 startbit_rtx
= expand_expr (startbit
, NULL_RTX
, MEM
,
4632 EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
);
4633 endbit_rtx
= expand_expr (endbit
, NULL_RTX
, MEM
,
4634 EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
);
4638 targetx
= assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (target
),
4639 GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (target
)),
4641 emit_move_insn (targetx
, target
);
4643 else if (GET_CODE (target
) == MEM
)
4648 #ifdef TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
4649 /* Optimization: If startbit and endbit are
4650 constants divisible by BITS_PER_UNIT,
4651 call memset instead. */
4652 if (TREE_CODE (startbit
) == INTEGER_CST
4653 && TREE_CODE (endbit
) == INTEGER_CST
4654 && (startb
= TREE_INT_CST_LOW (startbit
)) % BITS_PER_UNIT
== 0
4655 && (endb
= TREE_INT_CST_LOW (endbit
) + 1) % BITS_PER_UNIT
== 0)
4657 emit_library_call (memset_libfunc
, 0,
4659 plus_constant (XEXP (targetx
, 0),
4660 startb
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
),
4662 constm1_rtx
, TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node
),
4663 GEN_INT ((endb
- startb
) / BITS_PER_UNIT
),
4664 TYPE_MODE (sizetype
));
4669 emit_library_call (gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode
, "__setbits"),
4670 0, VOIDmode
, 4, XEXP (targetx
, 0), Pmode
,
4671 bitlength_rtx
, TYPE_MODE (sizetype
),
4672 startbit_rtx
, TYPE_MODE (sizetype
),
4673 endbit_rtx
, TYPE_MODE (sizetype
));
4676 emit_move_insn (target
, targetx
);
4684 /* Store the value of EXP (an expression tree)
4685 into a subfield of TARGET which has mode MODE and occupies
4686 BITSIZE bits, starting BITPOS bits from the start of TARGET.
4687 If MODE is VOIDmode, it means that we are storing into a bit-field.
4689 If VALUE_MODE is VOIDmode, return nothing in particular.
4690 UNSIGNEDP is not used in this case.
4692 Otherwise, return an rtx for the value stored. This rtx
4693 has mode VALUE_MODE if that is convenient to do.
4694 In this case, UNSIGNEDP must be nonzero if the value is an unsigned type.
4696 ALIGN is the alignment that TARGET is known to have, measured in bytes.
4697 TOTAL_SIZE is the size in bytes of the structure, or -1 if varying.
4699 ALIAS_SET is the alias set for the destination. This value will
4700 (in general) be different from that for TARGET, since TARGET is a
4701 reference to the containing structure. */
4704 store_field (target
, bitsize
, bitpos
, mode
, exp
, value_mode
,
4705 unsignedp
, align
, total_size
, alias_set
)
4707 int bitsize
, bitpos
;
4708 enum machine_mode mode
;
4710 enum machine_mode value_mode
;
4716 HOST_WIDE_INT width_mask
= 0;
4718 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == ERROR_MARK
)
4721 if (bitsize
< HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
4722 width_mask
= ((HOST_WIDE_INT
) 1 << bitsize
) - 1;
4724 /* If we are storing into an unaligned field of an aligned union that is
4725 in a register, we may have the mode of TARGET being an integer mode but
4726 MODE == BLKmode. In that case, get an aligned object whose size and
4727 alignment are the same as TARGET and store TARGET into it (we can avoid
4728 the store if the field being stored is the entire width of TARGET). Then
4729 call ourselves recursively to store the field into a BLKmode version of
4730 that object. Finally, load from the object into TARGET. This is not
4731 very efficient in general, but should only be slightly more expensive
4732 than the otherwise-required unaligned accesses. Perhaps this can be
4733 cleaned up later. */
4736 && (GET_CODE (target
) == REG
|| GET_CODE (target
) == SUBREG
))
4738 rtx object
= assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (target
),
4739 GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (target
)), 0);
4740 rtx blk_object
= copy_rtx (object
);
4742 MEM_SET_IN_STRUCT_P (object
, 1);
4743 MEM_SET_IN_STRUCT_P (blk_object
, 1);
4744 PUT_MODE (blk_object
, BLKmode
);
4746 if (bitsize
!= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (target
)))
4747 emit_move_insn (object
, target
);
4749 store_field (blk_object
, bitsize
, bitpos
, mode
, exp
, VOIDmode
, 0,
4750 align
, total_size
, alias_set
);
4752 /* Even though we aren't returning target, we need to
4753 give it the updated value. */
4754 emit_move_insn (target
, object
);
4759 /* If the structure is in a register or if the component
4760 is a bit field, we cannot use addressing to access it.
4761 Use bit-field techniques or SUBREG to store in it. */
4763 if (mode
== VOIDmode
4764 || (mode
!= BLKmode
&& ! direct_store
[(int) mode
]
4765 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) != MODE_COMPLEX_INT
4766 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) != MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT
)
4767 || GET_CODE (target
) == REG
4768 || GET_CODE (target
) == SUBREG
4769 /* If the field isn't aligned enough to store as an ordinary memref,
4770 store it as a bit field. */
4771 || (mode
!= BLKmode
&& SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode
, align
)
4772 && (align
* BITS_PER_UNIT
< GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
)
4773 || bitpos
% GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
)))
4774 || (mode
== BLKmode
&& SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode
, align
)
4775 && (TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp
)) > align
* BITS_PER_UNIT
4776 || bitpos
% TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp
)) != 0))
4777 /* If the RHS and field are a constant size and the size of the
4778 RHS isn't the same size as the bitfield, we must use bitfield
4781 && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
))) == INTEGER_CST
)
4782 && (TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
))) != 0
4783 || TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
))) != bitsize
)))
4785 rtx temp
= expand_expr (exp
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
4787 /* If BITSIZE is narrower than the size of the type of EXP
4788 we will be narrowing TEMP. Normally, what's wanted are the
4789 low-order bits. However, if EXP's type is a record and this is
4790 big-endian machine, we want the upper BITSIZE bits. */
4791 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
&& GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (temp
)) == MODE_INT
4792 && bitsize
< GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (temp
))
4793 && TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)) == RECORD_TYPE
)
4794 temp
= expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR
, GET_MODE (temp
), temp
,
4795 size_int (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (temp
))
4799 /* Unless MODE is VOIDmode or BLKmode, convert TEMP to
4801 if (mode
!= VOIDmode
&& mode
!= BLKmode
4802 && mode
!= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))
4803 temp
= convert_modes (mode
, TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)), temp
, 1);
4805 /* If the modes of TARGET and TEMP are both BLKmode, both
4806 must be in memory and BITPOS must be aligned on a byte
4807 boundary. If so, we simply do a block copy. */
4808 if (GET_MODE (target
) == BLKmode
&& GET_MODE (temp
) == BLKmode
)
4810 unsigned int exp_align
= expr_align (exp
) / BITS_PER_UNIT
;
4812 if (GET_CODE (target
) != MEM
|| GET_CODE (temp
) != MEM
4813 || bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
!= 0)
4816 target
= change_address (target
, VOIDmode
,
4817 plus_constant (XEXP (target
, 0),
4818 bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
));
4820 /* Make sure that ALIGN is no stricter than the alignment of EXP. */
4821 align
= MIN (exp_align
, align
);
4823 /* Find an alignment that is consistent with the bit position. */
4824 while ((bitpos
% (align
* BITS_PER_UNIT
)) != 0)
4827 emit_block_move (target
, temp
,
4828 GEN_INT ((bitsize
+ BITS_PER_UNIT
- 1)
4832 return value_mode
== VOIDmode
? const0_rtx
: target
;
4835 /* Store the value in the bitfield. */
4836 store_bit_field (target
, bitsize
, bitpos
, mode
, temp
, align
, total_size
);
4837 if (value_mode
!= VOIDmode
)
4839 /* The caller wants an rtx for the value. */
4840 /* If possible, avoid refetching from the bitfield itself. */
4842 && ! (GET_CODE (target
) == MEM
&& MEM_VOLATILE_P (target
)))
4845 enum machine_mode tmode
;
4848 return expand_and (temp
, GEN_INT (width_mask
), NULL_RTX
);
4849 tmode
= GET_MODE (temp
);
4850 if (tmode
== VOIDmode
)
4852 count
= build_int_2 (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (tmode
) - bitsize
, 0);
4853 temp
= expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR
, tmode
, temp
, count
, 0, 0);
4854 return expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR
, tmode
, temp
, count
, 0, 0);
4856 return extract_bit_field (target
, bitsize
, bitpos
, unsignedp
,
4857 NULL_RTX
, value_mode
, 0, align
,
4864 rtx addr
= XEXP (target
, 0);
4867 /* If a value is wanted, it must be the lhs;
4868 so make the address stable for multiple use. */
4870 if (value_mode
!= VOIDmode
&& GET_CODE (addr
) != REG
4871 && ! CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (addr
)
4872 /* A frame-pointer reference is already stable. */
4873 && ! (GET_CODE (addr
) == PLUS
4874 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr
, 1)) == CONST_INT
4875 && (XEXP (addr
, 0) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx
4876 || XEXP (addr
, 0) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx
)))
4877 addr
= copy_to_reg (addr
);
4879 /* Now build a reference to just the desired component. */
4881 to_rtx
= copy_rtx (change_address (target
, mode
,
4882 plus_constant (addr
,
4884 / BITS_PER_UNIT
))));
4885 MEM_SET_IN_STRUCT_P (to_rtx
, 1);
4886 MEM_ALIAS_SET (to_rtx
) = alias_set
;
4888 return store_expr (exp
, to_rtx
, value_mode
!= VOIDmode
);
4892 /* Given an expression EXP that may be a COMPONENT_REF, a BIT_FIELD_REF,
4893 or an ARRAY_REF, look for nested COMPONENT_REFs, BIT_FIELD_REFs, or
4894 ARRAY_REFs and find the ultimate containing object, which we return.
4896 We set *PBITSIZE to the size in bits that we want, *PBITPOS to the
4897 bit position, and *PUNSIGNEDP to the signedness of the field.
4898 If the position of the field is variable, we store a tree
4899 giving the variable offset (in units) in *POFFSET.
4900 This offset is in addition to the bit position.
4901 If the position is not variable, we store 0 in *POFFSET.
4902 We set *PALIGNMENT to the alignment in bytes of the address that will be
4903 computed. This is the alignment of the thing we return if *POFFSET
4904 is zero, but can be more less strictly aligned if *POFFSET is nonzero.
4906 If any of the extraction expressions is volatile,
4907 we store 1 in *PVOLATILEP. Otherwise we don't change that.
4909 If the field is a bit-field, *PMODE is set to VOIDmode. Otherwise, it
4910 is a mode that can be used to access the field. In that case, *PBITSIZE
4913 If the field describes a variable-sized object, *PMODE is set to
4914 VOIDmode and *PBITSIZE is set to -1. An access cannot be made in
4915 this case, but the address of the object can be found. */
4918 get_inner_reference (exp
, pbitsize
, pbitpos
, poffset
, pmode
,
4919 punsignedp
, pvolatilep
, palignment
)
4924 enum machine_mode
*pmode
;
4927 unsigned int *palignment
;
4929 tree orig_exp
= exp
;
4931 enum machine_mode mode
= VOIDmode
;
4932 tree offset
= size_zero_node
;
4933 unsigned int alignment
= BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
;
4935 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == COMPONENT_REF
)
4937 size_tree
= DECL_SIZE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1));
4938 if (! DECL_BIT_FIELD (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)))
4939 mode
= DECL_MODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1));
4940 *punsignedp
= TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1));
4942 else if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == BIT_FIELD_REF
)
4944 size_tree
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
4945 *punsignedp
= TREE_UNSIGNED (exp
);
4949 mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
4950 if (mode
== BLKmode
)
4951 size_tree
= TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
4953 *pbitsize
= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
);
4954 *punsignedp
= TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
4959 if (TREE_CODE (size_tree
) != INTEGER_CST
)
4960 mode
= BLKmode
, *pbitsize
= -1;
4962 *pbitsize
= TREE_INT_CST_LOW (size_tree
);
4965 /* Compute cumulative bit-offset for nested component-refs and array-refs,
4966 and find the ultimate containing object. */
4972 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == COMPONENT_REF
|| TREE_CODE (exp
) == BIT_FIELD_REF
)
4974 tree pos
= (TREE_CODE (exp
) == COMPONENT_REF
4975 ? DECL_FIELD_BITPOS (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1))
4976 : TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2));
4977 tree constant
= bitsize_int (0), var
= pos
;
4979 /* If this field hasn't been filled in yet, don't go
4980 past it. This should only happen when folding expressions
4981 made during type construction. */
4985 /* Assume here that the offset is a multiple of a unit.
4986 If not, there should be an explicitly added constant. */
4987 if (TREE_CODE (pos
) == PLUS_EXPR
4988 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (pos
, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
)
4989 constant
= TREE_OPERAND (pos
, 1), var
= TREE_OPERAND (pos
, 0);
4990 else if (TREE_CODE (pos
) == INTEGER_CST
)
4991 constant
= pos
, var
= bitsize_int (0);
4993 *pbitpos
+= TREE_INT_CST_LOW (constant
);
4995 = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR
, offset
,
4997 size_binop (EXACT_DIV_EXPR
, var
,
4998 bitsize_int (BITS_PER_UNIT
))));
5001 else if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == ARRAY_REF
)
5003 /* This code is based on the code in case ARRAY_REF in expand_expr
5004 below. We assume here that the size of an array element is
5005 always an integral multiple of BITS_PER_UNIT. */
5007 tree index
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
5008 tree domain
= TYPE_DOMAIN (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)));
5010 = domain
? TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain
) : integer_zero_node
;
5011 tree index_type
= TREE_TYPE (index
);
5014 if (TYPE_PRECISION (index_type
) != TYPE_PRECISION (sizetype
))
5016 index
= convert (type_for_size (TYPE_PRECISION (sizetype
), 0),
5018 index_type
= TREE_TYPE (index
);
5021 /* Optimize the special-case of a zero lower bound.
5023 We convert the low_bound to sizetype to avoid some problems
5024 with constant folding. (E.g. suppose the lower bound is 1,
5025 and its mode is QI. Without the conversion, (ARRAY
5026 +(INDEX-(unsigned char)1)) becomes ((ARRAY+(-(unsigned char)1))
5027 +INDEX), which becomes (ARRAY+255+INDEX). Oops!)
5029 But sizetype isn't quite right either (especially if
5030 the lowbound is negative). FIXME */
5032 if (! integer_zerop (low_bound
))
5033 index
= fold (build (MINUS_EXPR
, index_type
, index
,
5034 convert (sizetype
, low_bound
)));
5036 if (TREE_CODE (index
) == INTEGER_CST
)
5038 index
= convert (sbitsizetype
, index
);
5039 index_type
= TREE_TYPE (index
);
5042 xindex
= fold (build (MULT_EXPR
, sbitsizetype
, index
,
5043 convert (sbitsizetype
,
5044 TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))));
5046 if (TREE_CODE (xindex
) == INTEGER_CST
5047 && TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (xindex
) == 0)
5048 *pbitpos
+= TREE_INT_CST_LOW (xindex
);
5051 /* Either the bit offset calculated above is not constant, or
5052 it overflowed. In either case, redo the multiplication
5053 against the size in units. This is especially important
5054 in the non-constant case to avoid a division at runtime. */
5056 = fold (build (MULT_EXPR
, ssizetype
, index
,
5058 TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))));
5060 if (contains_placeholder_p (xindex
))
5061 xindex
= build (WITH_RECORD_EXPR
, ssizetype
, xindex
, exp
);
5064 = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR
, offset
, convert (sizetype
, xindex
));
5067 else if (TREE_CODE (exp
) != NON_LVALUE_EXPR
5068 && ! ((TREE_CODE (exp
) == NOP_EXPR
5069 || TREE_CODE (exp
) == CONVERT_EXPR
)
5070 && (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
))
5071 == TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))))))
5074 /* If any reference in the chain is volatile, the effect is volatile. */
5075 if (TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp
))
5078 /* If the offset is non-constant already, then we can't assume any
5079 alignment more than the alignment here. */
5080 if (! integer_zerop (offset
))
5081 alignment
= MIN (alignment
, TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
5083 exp
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
5086 if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (exp
)) == 'd')
5087 alignment
= MIN (alignment
, DECL_ALIGN (exp
));
5088 else if (TREE_TYPE (exp
) != 0)
5089 alignment
= MIN (alignment
, TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
5091 if (integer_zerop (offset
))
5094 if (offset
!= 0 && contains_placeholder_p (offset
))
5095 offset
= build (WITH_RECORD_EXPR
, sizetype
, offset
, orig_exp
);
5099 *palignment
= alignment
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
;
5103 /* Subroutine of expand_exp: compute memory_usage from modifier. */
5104 static enum memory_use_mode
5105 get_memory_usage_from_modifier (modifier
)
5106 enum expand_modifier modifier
;
5112 return MEMORY_USE_RO
;
5114 case EXPAND_MEMORY_USE_WO
:
5115 return MEMORY_USE_WO
;
5117 case EXPAND_MEMORY_USE_RW
:
5118 return MEMORY_USE_RW
;
5120 case EXPAND_MEMORY_USE_DONT
:
5121 /* EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS and EXPAND_INITIALIZER are converted into
5122 MEMORY_USE_DONT, because they are modifiers to a call of
5123 expand_expr in the ADDR_EXPR case of expand_expr. */
5124 case EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
:
5125 case EXPAND_INITIALIZER
:
5126 return MEMORY_USE_DONT
;
5127 case EXPAND_MEMORY_USE_BAD
:
5133 /* Given an rtx VALUE that may contain additions and multiplications,
5134 return an equivalent value that just refers to a register or memory.
5135 This is done by generating instructions to perform the arithmetic
5136 and returning a pseudo-register containing the value.
5138 The returned value may be a REG, SUBREG, MEM or constant. */
5141 force_operand (value
, target
)
5144 register optab binoptab
= 0;
5145 /* Use a temporary to force order of execution of calls to
5149 /* Use subtarget as the target for operand 0 of a binary operation. */
5150 register rtx subtarget
= (target
!= 0 && GET_CODE (target
) == REG
? target
: 0);
5152 /* Check for a PIC address load. */
5154 && (GET_CODE (value
) == PLUS
|| GET_CODE (value
) == MINUS
)
5155 && XEXP (value
, 0) == pic_offset_table_rtx
5156 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (value
, 1)) == SYMBOL_REF
5157 || GET_CODE (XEXP (value
, 1)) == LABEL_REF
5158 || GET_CODE (XEXP (value
, 1)) == CONST
))
5161 subtarget
= gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (value
));
5162 emit_move_insn (subtarget
, value
);
5166 if (GET_CODE (value
) == PLUS
)
5167 binoptab
= add_optab
;
5168 else if (GET_CODE (value
) == MINUS
)
5169 binoptab
= sub_optab
;
5170 else if (GET_CODE (value
) == MULT
)
5172 op2
= XEXP (value
, 1);
5173 if (!CONSTANT_P (op2
)
5174 && !(GET_CODE (op2
) == REG
&& op2
!= subtarget
))
5176 tmp
= force_operand (XEXP (value
, 0), subtarget
);
5177 return expand_mult (GET_MODE (value
), tmp
,
5178 force_operand (op2
, NULL_RTX
),
5184 op2
= XEXP (value
, 1);
5185 if (!CONSTANT_P (op2
)
5186 && !(GET_CODE (op2
) == REG
&& op2
!= subtarget
))
5188 if (binoptab
== sub_optab
&& GET_CODE (op2
) == CONST_INT
)
5190 binoptab
= add_optab
;
5191 op2
= negate_rtx (GET_MODE (value
), op2
);
5194 /* Check for an addition with OP2 a constant integer and our first
5195 operand a PLUS of a virtual register and something else. In that
5196 case, we want to emit the sum of the virtual register and the
5197 constant first and then add the other value. This allows virtual
5198 register instantiation to simply modify the constant rather than
5199 creating another one around this addition. */
5200 if (binoptab
== add_optab
&& GET_CODE (op2
) == CONST_INT
5201 && GET_CODE (XEXP (value
, 0)) == PLUS
5202 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (value
, 0), 0)) == REG
5203 && REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (value
, 0), 0)) >= FIRST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER
5204 && REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (value
, 0), 0)) <= LAST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER
)
5206 rtx temp
= expand_binop (GET_MODE (value
), binoptab
,
5207 XEXP (XEXP (value
, 0), 0), op2
,
5208 subtarget
, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
5209 return expand_binop (GET_MODE (value
), binoptab
, temp
,
5210 force_operand (XEXP (XEXP (value
, 0), 1), 0),
5211 target
, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
5214 tmp
= force_operand (XEXP (value
, 0), subtarget
);
5215 return expand_binop (GET_MODE (value
), binoptab
, tmp
,
5216 force_operand (op2
, NULL_RTX
),
5217 target
, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
5218 /* We give UNSIGNEDP = 0 to expand_binop
5219 because the only operations we are expanding here are signed ones. */
5224 /* Subroutine of expand_expr:
5225 save the non-copied parts (LIST) of an expr (LHS), and return a list
5226 which can restore these values to their previous values,
5227 should something modify their storage. */
5230 save_noncopied_parts (lhs
, list
)
5237 for (tail
= list
; tail
; tail
= TREE_CHAIN (tail
))
5238 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_VALUE (tail
)) == TREE_LIST
)
5239 parts
= chainon (parts
, save_noncopied_parts (lhs
, TREE_VALUE (tail
)));
5242 tree part
= TREE_VALUE (tail
);
5243 tree part_type
= TREE_TYPE (part
);
5244 tree to_be_saved
= build (COMPONENT_REF
, part_type
, lhs
, part
);
5245 rtx target
= assign_temp (part_type
, 0, 1, 1);
5246 if (! memory_address_p (TYPE_MODE (part_type
), XEXP (target
, 0)))
5247 target
= change_address (target
, TYPE_MODE (part_type
), NULL_RTX
);
5248 parts
= tree_cons (to_be_saved
,
5249 build (RTL_EXPR
, part_type
, NULL_TREE
,
5252 store_expr (TREE_PURPOSE (parts
), RTL_EXPR_RTL (TREE_VALUE (parts
)), 0);
5257 /* Subroutine of expand_expr:
5258 record the non-copied parts (LIST) of an expr (LHS), and return a list
5259 which specifies the initial values of these parts. */
5262 init_noncopied_parts (lhs
, list
)
5269 for (tail
= list
; tail
; tail
= TREE_CHAIN (tail
))
5270 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_VALUE (tail
)) == TREE_LIST
)
5271 parts
= chainon (parts
, init_noncopied_parts (lhs
, TREE_VALUE (tail
)));
5272 else if (TREE_PURPOSE (tail
))
5274 tree part
= TREE_VALUE (tail
);
5275 tree part_type
= TREE_TYPE (part
);
5276 tree to_be_initialized
= build (COMPONENT_REF
, part_type
, lhs
, part
);
5277 parts
= tree_cons (TREE_PURPOSE (tail
), to_be_initialized
, parts
);
5282 /* Subroutine of expand_expr: return nonzero iff there is no way that
5283 EXP can reference X, which is being modified. TOP_P is nonzero if this
5284 call is going to be used to determine whether we need a temporary
5285 for EXP, as opposed to a recursive call to this function.
5287 It is always safe for this routine to return zero since it merely
5288 searches for optimization opportunities. */
5291 safe_from_p (x
, exp
, top_p
)
5298 static int save_expr_count
;
5299 static int save_expr_size
= 0;
5300 static tree
*save_expr_rewritten
;
5301 static tree save_expr_trees
[256];
5304 /* If EXP has varying size, we MUST use a target since we currently
5305 have no way of allocating temporaries of variable size
5306 (except for arrays that have TYPE_ARRAY_MAX_SIZE set).
5307 So we assume here that something at a higher level has prevented a
5308 clash. This is somewhat bogus, but the best we can do. Only
5309 do this when X is BLKmode and when we are at the top level. */
5310 || (top_p
&& TREE_TYPE (exp
) != 0 && TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)) != 0
5311 && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
))) != INTEGER_CST
5312 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)) != ARRAY_TYPE
5313 || TYPE_ARRAY_MAX_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)) == NULL_TREE
5314 || TREE_CODE (TYPE_ARRAY_MAX_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))
5316 && GET_MODE (x
) == BLKmode
))
5319 if (top_p
&& save_expr_size
== 0)
5323 save_expr_count
= 0;
5324 save_expr_size
= sizeof (save_expr_trees
) / sizeof (save_expr_trees
[0]);
5325 save_expr_rewritten
= &save_expr_trees
[0];
5327 rtn
= safe_from_p (x
, exp
, 1);
5329 for (i
= 0; i
< save_expr_count
; ++i
)
5331 if (TREE_CODE (save_expr_trees
[i
]) != ERROR_MARK
)
5333 TREE_SET_CODE (save_expr_trees
[i
], SAVE_EXPR
);
5341 /* If this is a subreg of a hard register, declare it unsafe, otherwise,
5342 find the underlying pseudo. */
5343 if (GET_CODE (x
) == SUBREG
)
5346 if (GET_CODE (x
) == REG
&& REGNO (x
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
5350 /* If X is a location in the outgoing argument area, it is always safe. */
5351 if (GET_CODE (x
) == MEM
5352 && (XEXP (x
, 0) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
5353 || (GET_CODE (XEXP (x
, 0)) == PLUS
5354 && XEXP (XEXP (x
, 0), 0) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
)))
5357 switch (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (exp
)))
5360 exp_rtl
= DECL_RTL (exp
);
5367 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == TREE_LIST
)
5368 return ((TREE_VALUE (exp
) == 0
5369 || safe_from_p (x
, TREE_VALUE (exp
), 0))
5370 && (TREE_CHAIN (exp
) == 0
5371 || safe_from_p (x
, TREE_CHAIN (exp
), 0)));
5372 else if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == ERROR_MARK
)
5373 return 1; /* An already-visited SAVE_EXPR? */
5378 return safe_from_p (x
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0);
5382 return (safe_from_p (x
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0)
5383 && safe_from_p (x
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), 0));
5387 /* Now do code-specific tests. EXP_RTL is set to any rtx we find in
5388 the expression. If it is set, we conflict iff we are that rtx or
5389 both are in memory. Otherwise, we check all operands of the
5390 expression recursively. */
5392 switch (TREE_CODE (exp
))
5395 return (staticp (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))
5396 || safe_from_p (x
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0)
5397 || TREE_STATIC (exp
));
5400 if (GET_CODE (x
) == MEM
)
5405 exp_rtl
= CALL_EXPR_RTL (exp
);
5408 /* Assume that the call will clobber all hard registers and
5410 if ((GET_CODE (x
) == REG
&& REGNO (x
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
5411 || GET_CODE (x
) == MEM
)
5418 /* If a sequence exists, we would have to scan every instruction
5419 in the sequence to see if it was safe. This is probably not
5421 if (RTL_EXPR_SEQUENCE (exp
))
5424 exp_rtl
= RTL_EXPR_RTL (exp
);
5427 case WITH_CLEANUP_EXPR
:
5428 exp_rtl
= RTL_EXPR_RTL (exp
);
5431 case CLEANUP_POINT_EXPR
:
5432 return safe_from_p (x
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0);
5435 exp_rtl
= SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp
);
5439 /* This SAVE_EXPR might appear many times in the top-level
5440 safe_from_p() expression, and if it has a complex
5441 subexpression, examining it multiple times could result
5442 in a combinatorial explosion. E.g. on an Alpha
5443 running at least 200MHz, a Fortran test case compiled with
5444 optimization took about 28 minutes to compile -- even though
5445 it was only a few lines long, and the complicated line causing
5446 so much time to be spent in the earlier version of safe_from_p()
5447 had only 293 or so unique nodes.
5449 So, turn this SAVE_EXPR into an ERROR_MARK for now, but remember
5450 where it is so we can turn it back in the top-level safe_from_p()
5453 /* For now, don't bother re-sizing the array. */
5454 if (save_expr_count
>= save_expr_size
)
5456 save_expr_rewritten
[save_expr_count
++] = exp
;
5458 nops
= tree_code_length
[(int) SAVE_EXPR
];
5459 for (i
= 0; i
< nops
; i
++)
5461 tree operand
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, i
);
5462 if (operand
== NULL_TREE
)
5464 TREE_SET_CODE (exp
, ERROR_MARK
);
5465 if (!safe_from_p (x
, operand
, 0))
5467 TREE_SET_CODE (exp
, SAVE_EXPR
);
5469 TREE_SET_CODE (exp
, ERROR_MARK
);
5473 /* The only operand we look at is operand 1. The rest aren't
5474 part of the expression. */
5475 return safe_from_p (x
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), 0);
5477 case METHOD_CALL_EXPR
:
5478 /* This takes a rtx argument, but shouldn't appear here. */
5485 /* If we have an rtx, we do not need to scan our operands. */
5489 nops
= tree_code_length
[(int) TREE_CODE (exp
)];
5490 for (i
= 0; i
< nops
; i
++)
5491 if (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, i
) != 0
5492 && ! safe_from_p (x
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, i
), 0))
5496 /* If we have an rtl, find any enclosed object. Then see if we conflict
5500 if (GET_CODE (exp_rtl
) == SUBREG
)
5502 exp_rtl
= SUBREG_REG (exp_rtl
);
5503 if (GET_CODE (exp_rtl
) == REG
5504 && REGNO (exp_rtl
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
5508 /* If the rtl is X, then it is not safe. Otherwise, it is unless both
5509 are memory and EXP is not readonly. */
5510 return ! (rtx_equal_p (x
, exp_rtl
)
5511 || (GET_CODE (x
) == MEM
&& GET_CODE (exp_rtl
) == MEM
5512 && ! TREE_READONLY (exp
)));
5515 /* If we reach here, it is safe. */
5519 /* Subroutine of expand_expr: return nonzero iff EXP is an
5520 expression whose type is statically determinable. */
5526 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == PARM_DECL
5527 || TREE_CODE (exp
) == VAR_DECL
5528 || TREE_CODE (exp
) == CALL_EXPR
|| TREE_CODE (exp
) == TARGET_EXPR
5529 || TREE_CODE (exp
) == COMPONENT_REF
5530 || TREE_CODE (exp
) == ARRAY_REF
)
5535 /* Subroutine of expand_expr: return rtx if EXP is a
5536 variable or parameter; else return 0. */
5543 switch (TREE_CODE (exp
))
5547 return DECL_RTL (exp
);
5553 #ifdef MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE
5555 check_max_integer_computation_mode (exp
)
5558 enum tree_code code
;
5559 enum machine_mode mode
;
5561 /* Strip any NOPs that don't change the mode. */
5563 code
= TREE_CODE (exp
);
5565 /* We must allow conversions of constants to MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE. */
5566 if (code
== NOP_EXPR
5567 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)) == INTEGER_CST
)
5570 /* First check the type of the overall operation. We need only look at
5571 unary, binary and relational operations. */
5572 if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (code
) == '1'
5573 || TREE_CODE_CLASS (code
) == '2'
5574 || TREE_CODE_CLASS (code
) == '<')
5576 mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
5577 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
5578 && mode
> MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE
)
5579 fatal ("unsupported wide integer operation");
5582 /* Check operand of a unary op. */
5583 if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (code
) == '1')
5585 mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)));
5586 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
5587 && mode
> MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE
)
5588 fatal ("unsupported wide integer operation");
5591 /* Check operands of a binary/comparison op. */
5592 if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (code
) == '2' || TREE_CODE_CLASS (code
) == '<')
5594 mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)));
5595 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
5596 && mode
> MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE
)
5597 fatal ("unsupported wide integer operation");
5599 mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)));
5600 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
5601 && mode
> MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE
)
5602 fatal ("unsupported wide integer operation");
5608 /* Utility function used by expand_expr to see if TYPE, a RECORD_TYPE,
5609 has any readonly fields. If any of the fields have types that
5610 contain readonly fields, return true as well. */
5613 readonly_fields_p (type
)
5618 for (field
= TYPE_FIELDS (type
); field
!= 0; field
= TREE_CHAIN (field
))
5619 if (TREE_CODE (field
) == FIELD_DECL
5620 && (TREE_READONLY (field
)
5621 || (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field
)) == RECORD_TYPE
5622 && readonly_fields_p (TREE_TYPE (field
)))))
5628 /* expand_expr: generate code for computing expression EXP.
5629 An rtx for the computed value is returned. The value is never null.
5630 In the case of a void EXP, const0_rtx is returned.
5632 The value may be stored in TARGET if TARGET is nonzero.
5633 TARGET is just a suggestion; callers must assume that
5634 the rtx returned may not be the same as TARGET.
5636 If TARGET is CONST0_RTX, it means that the value will be ignored.
5638 If TMODE is not VOIDmode, it suggests generating the
5639 result in mode TMODE. But this is done only when convenient.
5640 Otherwise, TMODE is ignored and the value generated in its natural mode.
5641 TMODE is just a suggestion; callers must assume that
5642 the rtx returned may not have mode TMODE.
5644 Note that TARGET may have neither TMODE nor MODE. In that case, it
5645 probably will not be used.
5647 If MODIFIER is EXPAND_SUM then when EXP is an addition
5648 we can return an rtx of the form (MULT (REG ...) (CONST_INT ...))
5649 or a nest of (PLUS ...) and (MINUS ...) where the terms are
5650 products as above, or REG or MEM, or constant.
5651 Ordinarily in such cases we would output mul or add instructions
5652 and then return a pseudo reg containing the sum.
5654 EXPAND_INITIALIZER is much like EXPAND_SUM except that
5655 it also marks a label as absolutely required (it can't be dead).
5656 It also makes a ZERO_EXTEND or SIGN_EXTEND instead of emitting extend insns.
5657 This is used for outputting expressions used in initializers.
5659 EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS says that it is okay to return a MEM
5660 with a constant address even if that address is not normally legitimate.
5661 EXPAND_INITIALIZER and EXPAND_SUM also have this effect. */
5664 expand_expr (exp
, target
, tmode
, modifier
)
5667 enum machine_mode tmode
;
5668 enum expand_modifier modifier
;
5670 register rtx op0
, op1
, temp
;
5671 tree type
= TREE_TYPE (exp
);
5672 int unsignedp
= TREE_UNSIGNED (type
);
5673 register enum machine_mode mode
;
5674 register enum tree_code code
= TREE_CODE (exp
);
5676 rtx subtarget
, original_target
;
5679 /* Used by check-memory-usage to make modifier read only. */
5680 enum expand_modifier ro_modifier
;
5682 /* Handle ERROR_MARK before anybody tries to access its type. */
5683 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == ERROR_MARK
)
5685 op0
= CONST0_RTX (tmode
);
5691 mode
= TYPE_MODE (type
);
5692 /* Use subtarget as the target for operand 0 of a binary operation. */
5693 subtarget
= (target
!= 0 && GET_CODE (target
) == REG
? target
: 0);
5694 original_target
= target
;
5695 ignore
= (target
== const0_rtx
5696 || ((code
== NON_LVALUE_EXPR
|| code
== NOP_EXPR
5697 || code
== CONVERT_EXPR
|| code
== REFERENCE_EXPR
5698 || code
== COND_EXPR
)
5699 && TREE_CODE (type
) == VOID_TYPE
));
5701 /* Make a read-only version of the modifier. */
5702 if (modifier
== EXPAND_NORMAL
|| modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
5703 || modifier
== EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
|| modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
5704 ro_modifier
= modifier
;
5706 ro_modifier
= EXPAND_NORMAL
;
5708 /* Don't use hard regs as subtargets, because the combiner
5709 can only handle pseudo regs. */
5710 if (subtarget
&& REGNO (subtarget
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
5712 /* Avoid subtargets inside loops,
5713 since they hide some invariant expressions. */
5714 if (preserve_subexpressions_p ())
5717 /* If we are going to ignore this result, we need only do something
5718 if there is a side-effect somewhere in the expression. If there
5719 is, short-circuit the most common cases here. Note that we must
5720 not call expand_expr with anything but const0_rtx in case this
5721 is an initial expansion of a size that contains a PLACEHOLDER_EXPR. */
5725 if (! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (exp
))
5728 /* Ensure we reference a volatile object even if value is ignored, but
5729 don't do this if all we are doing is taking its address. */
5730 if (TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp
)
5731 && TREE_CODE (exp
) != FUNCTION_DECL
5732 && mode
!= VOIDmode
&& mode
!= BLKmode
5733 && modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
)
5735 temp
= expand_expr (exp
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, ro_modifier
);
5736 if (GET_CODE (temp
) == MEM
)
5737 temp
= copy_to_reg (temp
);
5741 if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (code
) == '1' || code
== COMPONENT_REF
5742 || code
== INDIRECT_REF
|| code
== BUFFER_REF
)
5743 return expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), const0_rtx
,
5744 VOIDmode
, ro_modifier
);
5745 else if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (code
) == '2' || TREE_CODE_CLASS (code
) == '<'
5746 || code
== ARRAY_REF
)
5748 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, ro_modifier
);
5749 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, ro_modifier
);
5752 else if ((code
== TRUTH_ANDIF_EXPR
|| code
== TRUTH_ORIF_EXPR
)
5753 && ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)))
5754 /* If the second operand has no side effects, just evaluate
5756 return expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), const0_rtx
,
5757 VOIDmode
, ro_modifier
);
5758 else if (code
== BIT_FIELD_REF
)
5760 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, ro_modifier
);
5761 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, ro_modifier
);
5762 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2), const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, ro_modifier
);
5769 #ifdef MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE
5770 /* Only check stuff here if the mode we want is different from the mode
5771 of the expression; if it's the same, check_max_integer_computiation_mode
5772 will handle it. Do we really need to check this stuff at all? */
5775 && GET_MODE (target
) != mode
5776 && TREE_CODE (exp
) != INTEGER_CST
5777 && TREE_CODE (exp
) != PARM_DECL
5778 && TREE_CODE (exp
) != ARRAY_REF
5779 && TREE_CODE (exp
) != COMPONENT_REF
5780 && TREE_CODE (exp
) != BIT_FIELD_REF
5781 && TREE_CODE (exp
) != INDIRECT_REF
5782 && TREE_CODE (exp
) != CALL_EXPR
5783 && TREE_CODE (exp
) != VAR_DECL
5784 && TREE_CODE (exp
) != RTL_EXPR
)
5786 enum machine_mode mode
= GET_MODE (target
);
5788 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
5789 && mode
> MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE
)
5790 fatal ("unsupported wide integer operation");
5794 && TREE_CODE (exp
) != INTEGER_CST
5795 && TREE_CODE (exp
) != PARM_DECL
5796 && TREE_CODE (exp
) != ARRAY_REF
5797 && TREE_CODE (exp
) != COMPONENT_REF
5798 && TREE_CODE (exp
) != BIT_FIELD_REF
5799 && TREE_CODE (exp
) != INDIRECT_REF
5800 && TREE_CODE (exp
) != VAR_DECL
5801 && TREE_CODE (exp
) != CALL_EXPR
5802 && TREE_CODE (exp
) != RTL_EXPR
5803 && GET_MODE_CLASS (tmode
) == MODE_INT
5804 && tmode
> MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE
)
5805 fatal ("unsupported wide integer operation");
5807 check_max_integer_computation_mode (exp
);
5810 /* If will do cse, generate all results into pseudo registers
5811 since 1) that allows cse to find more things
5812 and 2) otherwise cse could produce an insn the machine
5815 if (! cse_not_expected
&& mode
!= BLKmode
&& target
5816 && (GET_CODE (target
) != REG
|| REGNO (target
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
))
5823 tree function
= decl_function_context (exp
);
5824 /* Handle using a label in a containing function. */
5825 if (function
!= current_function_decl
5826 && function
!= inline_function_decl
&& function
!= 0)
5828 struct function
*p
= find_function_data (function
);
5829 /* Allocate in the memory associated with the function
5830 that the label is in. */
5831 push_obstacks (p
->function_obstack
,
5832 p
->function_maybepermanent_obstack
);
5834 p
->expr
->x_forced_labels
5835 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode
, label_rtx (exp
),
5836 p
->expr
->x_forced_labels
);
5841 if (modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
5842 forced_labels
= gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode
,
5847 temp
= gen_rtx_MEM (FUNCTION_MODE
,
5848 gen_rtx_LABEL_REF (Pmode
, label_rtx (exp
)));
5849 if (function
!= current_function_decl
5850 && function
!= inline_function_decl
&& function
!= 0)
5851 LABEL_REF_NONLOCAL_P (XEXP (temp
, 0)) = 1;
5856 if (DECL_RTL (exp
) == 0)
5858 error_with_decl (exp
, "prior parameter's size depends on `%s'");
5859 return CONST0_RTX (mode
);
5862 /* ... fall through ... */
5865 /* If a static var's type was incomplete when the decl was written,
5866 but the type is complete now, lay out the decl now. */
5867 if (DECL_SIZE (exp
) == 0 && TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)) != 0
5868 && (TREE_STATIC (exp
) || DECL_EXTERNAL (exp
)))
5870 push_obstacks_nochange ();
5871 end_temporary_allocation ();
5872 layout_decl (exp
, 0);
5873 PUT_MODE (DECL_RTL (exp
), DECL_MODE (exp
));
5877 /* Although static-storage variables start off initialized, according to
5878 ANSI C, a memcpy could overwrite them with uninitialized values. So
5879 we check them too. This also lets us check for read-only variables
5880 accessed via a non-const declaration, in case it won't be detected
5881 any other way (e.g., in an embedded system or OS kernel without
5884 Aggregates are not checked here; they're handled elsewhere. */
5885 if (cfun
&& current_function_check_memory_usage
5887 && GET_CODE (DECL_RTL (exp
)) == MEM
5888 && ! AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))
5890 enum memory_use_mode memory_usage
;
5891 memory_usage
= get_memory_usage_from_modifier (modifier
);
5893 if (memory_usage
!= MEMORY_USE_DONT
)
5894 emit_library_call (chkr_check_addr_libfunc
, 1, VOIDmode
, 3,
5895 XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp
), 0), Pmode
,
5896 GEN_INT (int_size_in_bytes (type
)),
5897 TYPE_MODE (sizetype
),
5898 GEN_INT (memory_usage
),
5899 TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node
));
5902 /* ... fall through ... */
5906 if (DECL_RTL (exp
) == 0)
5909 /* Ensure variable marked as used even if it doesn't go through
5910 a parser. If it hasn't be used yet, write out an external
5912 if (! TREE_USED (exp
))
5914 assemble_external (exp
);
5915 TREE_USED (exp
) = 1;
5918 /* Show we haven't gotten RTL for this yet. */
5921 /* Handle variables inherited from containing functions. */
5922 context
= decl_function_context (exp
);
5924 /* We treat inline_function_decl as an alias for the current function
5925 because that is the inline function whose vars, types, etc.
5926 are being merged into the current function.
5927 See expand_inline_function. */
5929 if (context
!= 0 && context
!= current_function_decl
5930 && context
!= inline_function_decl
5931 /* If var is static, we don't need a static chain to access it. */
5932 && ! (GET_CODE (DECL_RTL (exp
)) == MEM
5933 && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp
), 0))))
5937 /* Mark as non-local and addressable. */
5938 DECL_NONLOCAL (exp
) = 1;
5939 if (DECL_NO_STATIC_CHAIN (current_function_decl
))
5941 mark_addressable (exp
);
5942 if (GET_CODE (DECL_RTL (exp
)) != MEM
)
5944 addr
= XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp
), 0);
5945 if (GET_CODE (addr
) == MEM
)
5946 addr
= gen_rtx_MEM (Pmode
,
5947 fix_lexical_addr (XEXP (addr
, 0), exp
));
5949 addr
= fix_lexical_addr (addr
, exp
);
5950 temp
= change_address (DECL_RTL (exp
), mode
, addr
);
5953 /* This is the case of an array whose size is to be determined
5954 from its initializer, while the initializer is still being parsed.
5957 else if (GET_CODE (DECL_RTL (exp
)) == MEM
5958 && GET_CODE (XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp
), 0)) == REG
)
5959 temp
= change_address (DECL_RTL (exp
), GET_MODE (DECL_RTL (exp
)),
5960 XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp
), 0));
5962 /* If DECL_RTL is memory, we are in the normal case and either
5963 the address is not valid or it is not a register and -fforce-addr
5964 is specified, get the address into a register. */
5966 else if (GET_CODE (DECL_RTL (exp
)) == MEM
5967 && modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
5968 && modifier
!= EXPAND_SUM
5969 && modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
5970 && (! memory_address_p (DECL_MODE (exp
),
5971 XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp
), 0))
5973 && GET_CODE (XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp
), 0)) != REG
)))
5974 temp
= change_address (DECL_RTL (exp
), VOIDmode
,
5975 copy_rtx (XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp
), 0)));
5977 /* If we got something, return it. But first, set the alignment
5978 the address is a register. */
5981 if (GET_CODE (temp
) == MEM
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (temp
, 0)) == REG
)
5982 mark_reg_pointer (XEXP (temp
, 0),
5983 DECL_ALIGN (exp
) / BITS_PER_UNIT
);
5988 /* If the mode of DECL_RTL does not match that of the decl, it
5989 must be a promoted value. We return a SUBREG of the wanted mode,
5990 but mark it so that we know that it was already extended. */
5992 if (GET_CODE (DECL_RTL (exp
)) == REG
5993 && GET_MODE (DECL_RTL (exp
)) != mode
)
5995 /* Get the signedness used for this variable. Ensure we get the
5996 same mode we got when the variable was declared. */
5997 if (GET_MODE (DECL_RTL (exp
))
5998 != promote_mode (type
, DECL_MODE (exp
), &unsignedp
, 0))
6001 temp
= gen_rtx_SUBREG (mode
, DECL_RTL (exp
), 0);
6002 SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (temp
) = 1;
6003 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (temp
) = unsignedp
;
6007 return DECL_RTL (exp
);
6010 return immed_double_const (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (exp
),
6011 TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (exp
),
6015 return expand_expr (DECL_INITIAL (exp
), target
, VOIDmode
,
6016 EXPAND_MEMORY_USE_BAD
);
6019 /* If optimized, generate immediate CONST_DOUBLE
6020 which will be turned into memory by reload if necessary.
6022 We used to force a register so that loop.c could see it. But
6023 this does not allow gen_* patterns to perform optimizations with
6024 the constants. It also produces two insns in cases like "x = 1.0;".
6025 On most machines, floating-point constants are not permitted in
6026 many insns, so we'd end up copying it to a register in any case.
6028 Now, we do the copying in expand_binop, if appropriate. */
6029 return immed_real_const (exp
);
6033 if (! TREE_CST_RTL (exp
))
6034 output_constant_def (exp
);
6036 /* TREE_CST_RTL probably contains a constant address.
6037 On RISC machines where a constant address isn't valid,
6038 make some insns to get that address into a register. */
6039 if (GET_CODE (TREE_CST_RTL (exp
)) == MEM
6040 && modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
6041 && modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
6042 && modifier
!= EXPAND_SUM
6043 && (! memory_address_p (mode
, XEXP (TREE_CST_RTL (exp
), 0))
6045 && GET_CODE (XEXP (TREE_CST_RTL (exp
), 0)) != REG
)))
6046 return change_address (TREE_CST_RTL (exp
), VOIDmode
,
6047 copy_rtx (XEXP (TREE_CST_RTL (exp
), 0)));
6048 return TREE_CST_RTL (exp
);
6050 case EXPR_WITH_FILE_LOCATION
:
6053 char *saved_input_filename
= input_filename
;
6054 int saved_lineno
= lineno
;
6055 input_filename
= EXPR_WFL_FILENAME (exp
);
6056 lineno
= EXPR_WFL_LINENO (exp
);
6057 if (EXPR_WFL_EMIT_LINE_NOTE (exp
))
6058 emit_line_note (input_filename
, lineno
);
6059 /* Possibly avoid switching back and force here */
6060 to_return
= expand_expr (EXPR_WFL_NODE (exp
), target
, tmode
, modifier
);
6061 input_filename
= saved_input_filename
;
6062 lineno
= saved_lineno
;
6067 context
= decl_function_context (exp
);
6069 /* If this SAVE_EXPR was at global context, assume we are an
6070 initialization function and move it into our context. */
6072 SAVE_EXPR_CONTEXT (exp
) = current_function_decl
;
6074 /* We treat inline_function_decl as an alias for the current function
6075 because that is the inline function whose vars, types, etc.
6076 are being merged into the current function.
6077 See expand_inline_function. */
6078 if (context
== current_function_decl
|| context
== inline_function_decl
)
6081 /* If this is non-local, handle it. */
6084 /* The following call just exists to abort if the context is
6085 not of a containing function. */
6086 find_function_data (context
);
6088 temp
= SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp
);
6089 if (temp
&& GET_CODE (temp
) == REG
)
6091 put_var_into_stack (exp
);
6092 temp
= SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp
);
6094 if (temp
== 0 || GET_CODE (temp
) != MEM
)
6096 return change_address (temp
, mode
,
6097 fix_lexical_addr (XEXP (temp
, 0), exp
));
6099 if (SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp
) == 0)
6101 if (mode
== VOIDmode
)
6104 temp
= assign_temp (type
, 3, 0, 0);
6106 SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp
) = temp
;
6107 if (!optimize
&& GET_CODE (temp
) == REG
)
6108 save_expr_regs
= gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode
, temp
,
6111 /* If the mode of TEMP does not match that of the expression, it
6112 must be a promoted value. We pass store_expr a SUBREG of the
6113 wanted mode but mark it so that we know that it was already
6114 extended. Note that `unsignedp' was modified above in
6117 if (GET_CODE (temp
) == REG
&& GET_MODE (temp
) != mode
)
6119 temp
= gen_rtx_SUBREG (mode
, SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp
), 0);
6120 SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (temp
) = 1;
6121 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (temp
) = unsignedp
;
6124 if (temp
== const0_rtx
)
6125 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
,
6126 EXPAND_MEMORY_USE_BAD
);
6128 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), temp
, 0);
6130 TREE_USED (exp
) = 1;
6133 /* If the mode of SAVE_EXPR_RTL does not match that of the expression, it
6134 must be a promoted value. We return a SUBREG of the wanted mode,
6135 but mark it so that we know that it was already extended. */
6137 if (GET_CODE (SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp
)) == REG
6138 && GET_MODE (SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp
)) != mode
)
6140 /* Compute the signedness and make the proper SUBREG. */
6141 promote_mode (type
, mode
, &unsignedp
, 0);
6142 temp
= gen_rtx_SUBREG (mode
, SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp
), 0);
6143 SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (temp
) = 1;
6144 SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (temp
) = unsignedp
;
6148 return SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp
);
6153 temp
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), target
, tmode
, modifier
);
6154 TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0) = unsave_expr_now (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0));
6158 case PLACEHOLDER_EXPR
:
6160 tree placeholder_expr
;
6162 /* If there is an object on the head of the placeholder list,
6163 see if some object in it of type TYPE or a pointer to it. For
6164 further information, see tree.def. */
6165 for (placeholder_expr
= placeholder_list
;
6166 placeholder_expr
!= 0;
6167 placeholder_expr
= TREE_CHAIN (placeholder_expr
))
6169 tree need_type
= TYPE_MAIN_VARIANT (type
);
6171 tree old_list
= placeholder_list
;
6174 /* Find the outermost reference that is of the type we want.
6175 If none, see if any object has a type that is a pointer to
6176 the type we want. */
6177 for (elt
= TREE_PURPOSE (placeholder_expr
);
6178 elt
!= 0 && object
== 0;
6180 = ((TREE_CODE (elt
) == COMPOUND_EXPR
6181 || TREE_CODE (elt
) == COND_EXPR
)
6182 ? TREE_OPERAND (elt
, 1)
6183 : (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (elt
)) == 'r'
6184 || TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (elt
)) == '1'
6185 || TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (elt
)) == '2'
6186 || TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (elt
)) == 'e')
6187 ? TREE_OPERAND (elt
, 0) : 0))
6188 if (TYPE_MAIN_VARIANT (TREE_TYPE (elt
)) == need_type
)
6191 for (elt
= TREE_PURPOSE (placeholder_expr
);
6192 elt
!= 0 && object
== 0;
6194 = ((TREE_CODE (elt
) == COMPOUND_EXPR
6195 || TREE_CODE (elt
) == COND_EXPR
)
6196 ? TREE_OPERAND (elt
, 1)
6197 : (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (elt
)) == 'r'
6198 || TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (elt
)) == '1'
6199 || TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (elt
)) == '2'
6200 || TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (elt
)) == 'e')
6201 ? TREE_OPERAND (elt
, 0) : 0))
6202 if (POINTER_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (elt
))
6203 && (TYPE_MAIN_VARIANT (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (elt
)))
6205 object
= build1 (INDIRECT_REF
, need_type
, elt
);
6209 /* Expand this object skipping the list entries before
6210 it was found in case it is also a PLACEHOLDER_EXPR.
6211 In that case, we want to translate it using subsequent
6213 placeholder_list
= TREE_CHAIN (placeholder_expr
);
6214 temp
= expand_expr (object
, original_target
, tmode
,
6216 placeholder_list
= old_list
;
6222 /* We can't find the object or there was a missing WITH_RECORD_EXPR. */
6225 case WITH_RECORD_EXPR
:
6226 /* Put the object on the placeholder list, expand our first operand,
6227 and pop the list. */
6228 placeholder_list
= tree_cons (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), NULL_TREE
,
6230 target
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), original_target
,
6231 tmode
, ro_modifier
);
6232 placeholder_list
= TREE_CHAIN (placeholder_list
);
6236 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)) == LABEL_DECL
)
6237 expand_goto (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0));
6239 expand_computed_goto (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0));
6243 expand_exit_loop_if_false (NULL_PTR
,
6244 invert_truthvalue (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)));
6247 case LABELED_BLOCK_EXPR
:
6248 if (LABELED_BLOCK_BODY (exp
))
6249 expand_expr_stmt (LABELED_BLOCK_BODY (exp
));
6250 emit_label (label_rtx (LABELED_BLOCK_LABEL (exp
)));
6253 case EXIT_BLOCK_EXPR
:
6254 if (EXIT_BLOCK_RETURN (exp
))
6255 sorry ("returned value in block_exit_expr");
6256 expand_goto (LABELED_BLOCK_LABEL (EXIT_BLOCK_LABELED_BLOCK (exp
)));
6261 expand_start_loop (1);
6262 expand_expr_stmt (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0));
6270 tree vars
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
6271 int vars_need_expansion
= 0;
6273 /* Need to open a binding contour here because
6274 if there are any cleanups they must be contained here. */
6275 expand_start_bindings (2);
6277 /* Mark the corresponding BLOCK for output in its proper place. */
6278 if (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2) != 0
6279 && ! TREE_USED (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2)))
6280 insert_block (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2));
6282 /* If VARS have not yet been expanded, expand them now. */
6285 if (DECL_RTL (vars
) == 0)
6287 vars_need_expansion
= 1;
6290 expand_decl_init (vars
);
6291 vars
= TREE_CHAIN (vars
);
6294 temp
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), target
, tmode
, ro_modifier
);
6296 expand_end_bindings (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0, 0);
6302 if (RTL_EXPR_SEQUENCE (exp
))
6304 if (RTL_EXPR_SEQUENCE (exp
) == const0_rtx
)
6306 emit_insns (RTL_EXPR_SEQUENCE (exp
));
6307 RTL_EXPR_SEQUENCE (exp
) = const0_rtx
;
6309 preserve_rtl_expr_result (RTL_EXPR_RTL (exp
));
6310 free_temps_for_rtl_expr (exp
);
6311 return RTL_EXPR_RTL (exp
);
6314 /* If we don't need the result, just ensure we evaluate any
6319 for (elt
= CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp
); elt
; elt
= TREE_CHAIN (elt
))
6320 expand_expr (TREE_VALUE (elt
), const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
,
6321 EXPAND_MEMORY_USE_BAD
);
6325 /* All elts simple constants => refer to a constant in memory. But
6326 if this is a non-BLKmode mode, let it store a field at a time
6327 since that should make a CONST_INT or CONST_DOUBLE when we
6328 fold. Likewise, if we have a target we can use, it is best to
6329 store directly into the target unless the type is large enough
6330 that memcpy will be used. If we are making an initializer and
6331 all operands are constant, put it in memory as well. */
6332 else if ((TREE_STATIC (exp
)
6333 && ((mode
== BLKmode
6334 && ! (target
!= 0 && safe_from_p (target
, exp
, 1)))
6335 || TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp
)
6336 || (TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (type
)) == INTEGER_CST
6337 && (!MOVE_BY_PIECES_P
6338 (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TYPE_SIZE (type
))/BITS_PER_UNIT
,
6339 TYPE_ALIGN (type
) / BITS_PER_UNIT
))
6340 && ! mostly_zeros_p (exp
))))
6341 || (modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
&& TREE_CONSTANT (exp
)))
6343 rtx constructor
= output_constant_def (exp
);
6344 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
6345 && modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
6346 && modifier
!= EXPAND_SUM
6347 && (! memory_address_p (GET_MODE (constructor
),
6348 XEXP (constructor
, 0))
6350 && GET_CODE (XEXP (constructor
, 0)) != REG
)))
6351 constructor
= change_address (constructor
, VOIDmode
,
6352 XEXP (constructor
, 0));
6358 /* Handle calls that pass values in multiple non-contiguous
6359 locations. The Irix 6 ABI has examples of this. */
6360 if (target
== 0 || ! safe_from_p (target
, exp
, 1)
6361 || GET_CODE (target
) == PARALLEL
)
6363 if (mode
!= BLKmode
&& ! TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp
))
6364 target
= gen_reg_rtx (tmode
!= VOIDmode
? tmode
: mode
);
6366 target
= assign_temp (type
, 0, 1, 1);
6369 if (TREE_READONLY (exp
))
6371 if (GET_CODE (target
) == MEM
)
6372 target
= copy_rtx (target
);
6374 RTX_UNCHANGING_P (target
) = 1;
6377 store_constructor (exp
, target
, TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp
)), 0,
6378 int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
6384 tree exp1
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
6387 tree string
= string_constant (exp1
, &index
);
6390 /* Try to optimize reads from const strings. */
6392 && TREE_CODE (string
) == STRING_CST
6393 && TREE_CODE (index
) == INTEGER_CST
6394 && !TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (index
)
6395 && (i
= TREE_INT_CST_LOW (index
)) < TREE_STRING_LENGTH (string
)
6396 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
6397 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) == 1
6398 && modifier
!= EXPAND_MEMORY_USE_WO
)
6399 return GEN_INT (TREE_STRING_POINTER (string
)[i
]);
6401 op0
= expand_expr (exp1
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_SUM
);
6402 op0
= memory_address (mode
, op0
);
6404 if (cfun
&& current_function_check_memory_usage
6405 && ! AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))
6407 enum memory_use_mode memory_usage
;
6408 memory_usage
= get_memory_usage_from_modifier (modifier
);
6410 if (memory_usage
!= MEMORY_USE_DONT
)
6412 in_check_memory_usage
= 1;
6413 emit_library_call (chkr_check_addr_libfunc
, 1, VOIDmode
, 3,
6415 GEN_INT (int_size_in_bytes (type
)),
6416 TYPE_MODE (sizetype
),
6417 GEN_INT (memory_usage
),
6418 TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node
));
6419 in_check_memory_usage
= 0;
6423 temp
= gen_rtx_MEM (mode
, op0
);
6424 /* If address was computed by addition,
6425 mark this as an element of an aggregate. */
6426 if (TREE_CODE (exp1
) == PLUS_EXPR
6427 || (TREE_CODE (exp1
) == SAVE_EXPR
6428 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp1
, 0)) == PLUS_EXPR
)
6429 || AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp
))
6430 || (TREE_CODE (exp1
) == ADDR_EXPR
6431 && (exp2
= TREE_OPERAND (exp1
, 0))
6432 && AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (exp2
))))
6433 MEM_SET_IN_STRUCT_P (temp
, 1);
6435 MEM_VOLATILE_P (temp
) = TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp
) | flag_volatile
;
6436 MEM_ALIAS_SET (temp
) = get_alias_set (exp
);
6438 /* It is incorrect to set RTX_UNCHANGING_P from TREE_READONLY
6439 here, because, in C and C++, the fact that a location is accessed
6440 through a pointer to const does not mean that the value there can
6441 never change. Languages where it can never change should
6442 also set TREE_STATIC. */
6443 RTX_UNCHANGING_P (temp
) = TREE_READONLY (exp
) & TREE_STATIC (exp
);
6445 /* If we are writing to this object and its type is a record with
6446 readonly fields, we must mark it as readonly so it will
6447 conflict with readonly references to those fields. */
6448 if (modifier
== EXPAND_MEMORY_USE_WO
6449 && TREE_CODE (type
) == RECORD_TYPE
&& readonly_fields_p (type
))
6450 RTX_UNCHANGING_P (temp
) = 1;
6456 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))) != ARRAY_TYPE
)
6460 tree array
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
6461 tree domain
= TYPE_DOMAIN (TREE_TYPE (array
));
6462 tree low_bound
= domain
? TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain
) : integer_zero_node
;
6463 tree index
= convert (sizetype
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1));
6466 /* Optimize the special-case of a zero lower bound.
6468 We convert the low_bound to sizetype to avoid some problems
6469 with constant folding. (E.g. suppose the lower bound is 1,
6470 and its mode is QI. Without the conversion, (ARRAY
6471 +(INDEX-(unsigned char)1)) becomes ((ARRAY+(-(unsigned char)1))
6472 +INDEX), which becomes (ARRAY+255+INDEX). Oops!) */
6474 if (! integer_zerop (low_bound
))
6475 index
= size_diffop (index
, convert (sizetype
, low_bound
));
6477 /* Fold an expression like: "foo"[2].
6478 This is not done in fold so it won't happen inside &.
6479 Don't fold if this is for wide characters since it's too
6480 difficult to do correctly and this is a very rare case. */
6482 if (TREE_CODE (array
) == STRING_CST
6483 && TREE_CODE (index
) == INTEGER_CST
6484 && !TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (index
)
6485 && (i
= TREE_INT_CST_LOW (index
)) < TREE_STRING_LENGTH (array
)
6486 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
6487 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) == 1)
6488 return GEN_INT (TREE_STRING_POINTER (array
)[i
]);
6490 /* If this is a constant index into a constant array,
6491 just get the value from the array. Handle both the cases when
6492 we have an explicit constructor and when our operand is a variable
6493 that was declared const. */
6495 if (TREE_CODE (array
) == CONSTRUCTOR
&& ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (array
))
6497 if (TREE_CODE (index
) == INTEGER_CST
6498 && TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (index
) == 0)
6500 tree elem
= CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0));
6502 i
= TREE_INT_CST_LOW (index
);
6504 elem
= TREE_CHAIN (elem
);
6506 return expand_expr (fold (TREE_VALUE (elem
)), target
,
6507 tmode
, ro_modifier
);
6511 else if (optimize
>= 1
6512 && TREE_READONLY (array
) && ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (array
)
6513 && TREE_CODE (array
) == VAR_DECL
&& DECL_INITIAL (array
)
6514 && TREE_CODE (DECL_INITIAL (array
)) != ERROR_MARK
)
6516 if (TREE_CODE (index
) == INTEGER_CST
)
6518 tree init
= DECL_INITIAL (array
);
6520 i
= TREE_INT_CST_LOW (index
);
6521 if (TREE_CODE (init
) == CONSTRUCTOR
)
6523 tree elem
= CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (init
);
6526 && !tree_int_cst_equal (TREE_PURPOSE (elem
), index
))
6527 elem
= TREE_CHAIN (elem
);
6529 return expand_expr (fold (TREE_VALUE (elem
)), target
,
6530 tmode
, ro_modifier
);
6532 else if (TREE_CODE (init
) == STRING_CST
6533 && TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (index
) == 0
6534 && (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (index
)
6535 < TREE_STRING_LENGTH (init
)))
6537 (TREE_STRING_POINTER
6538 (init
)[TREE_INT_CST_LOW (index
)]));
6543 /* ... fall through ... */
6547 /* If the operand is a CONSTRUCTOR, we can just extract the
6548 appropriate field if it is present. Don't do this if we have
6549 already written the data since we want to refer to that copy
6550 and varasm.c assumes that's what we'll do. */
6551 if (code
!= ARRAY_REF
6552 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)) == CONSTRUCTOR
6553 && TREE_CST_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)) == 0)
6557 for (elt
= CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)); elt
;
6558 elt
= TREE_CHAIN (elt
))
6559 if (TREE_PURPOSE (elt
) == TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)
6560 /* We can normally use the value of the field in the
6561 CONSTRUCTOR. However, if this is a bitfield in
6562 an integral mode that we can fit in a HOST_WIDE_INT,
6563 we must mask only the number of bits in the bitfield,
6564 since this is done implicitly by the constructor. If
6565 the bitfield does not meet either of those conditions,
6566 we can't do this optimization. */
6567 && (! DECL_BIT_FIELD (TREE_PURPOSE (elt
))
6568 || ((GET_MODE_CLASS (DECL_MODE (TREE_PURPOSE (elt
)))
6570 && (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (DECL_MODE (TREE_PURPOSE (elt
)))
6571 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
))))
6573 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_VALUE (elt
), target
, tmode
, modifier
);
6574 if (DECL_BIT_FIELD (TREE_PURPOSE (elt
)))
6576 HOST_WIDE_INT bitsize
6577 = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (DECL_SIZE (TREE_PURPOSE (elt
)));
6579 if (TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_PURPOSE (elt
))))
6581 op1
= GEN_INT (((HOST_WIDE_INT
) 1 << bitsize
) - 1);
6582 op0
= expand_and (op0
, op1
, target
);
6586 enum machine_mode imode
6587 = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_PURPOSE (elt
)));
6589 = build_int_2 (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (imode
) - bitsize
,
6592 op0
= expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR
, imode
, op0
, count
,
6594 op0
= expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR
, imode
, op0
, count
,
6604 enum machine_mode mode1
;
6609 unsigned int alignment
;
6610 tree tem
= get_inner_reference (exp
, &bitsize
, &bitpos
, &offset
,
6611 &mode1
, &unsignedp
, &volatilep
,
6614 /* If we got back the original object, something is wrong. Perhaps
6615 we are evaluating an expression too early. In any event, don't
6616 infinitely recurse. */
6620 /* If TEM's type is a union of variable size, pass TARGET to the inner
6621 computation, since it will need a temporary and TARGET is known
6622 to have to do. This occurs in unchecked conversion in Ada. */
6624 op0
= expand_expr (tem
,
6625 (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (tem
)) == UNION_TYPE
6626 && (TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (tem
)))
6628 ? target
: NULL_RTX
),
6630 (modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
6631 || modifier
== EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
)
6632 ? modifier
: EXPAND_NORMAL
);
6634 /* If this is a constant, put it into a register if it is a
6635 legitimate constant and OFFSET is 0 and memory if it isn't. */
6636 if (CONSTANT_P (op0
))
6638 enum machine_mode mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (tem
));
6639 if (mode
!= BLKmode
&& LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (op0
)
6641 op0
= force_reg (mode
, op0
);
6643 op0
= validize_mem (force_const_mem (mode
, op0
));
6648 rtx offset_rtx
= expand_expr (offset
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
6650 /* If this object is in memory, put it into a register.
6651 This case can't occur in C, but can in Ada if we have
6652 unchecked conversion of an expression from a scalar type to
6653 an array or record type. */
6654 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == REG
|| GET_CODE (op0
) == SUBREG
6655 || GET_CODE (op0
) == CONCAT
|| GET_CODE (op0
) == ADDRESSOF
)
6657 rtx memloc
= assign_temp (TREE_TYPE (tem
), 1, 1, 1);
6659 mark_temp_addr_taken (memloc
);
6660 emit_move_insn (memloc
, op0
);
6664 if (GET_CODE (op0
) != MEM
)
6667 if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx
) != ptr_mode
)
6669 #ifdef POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
6670 offset_rtx
= convert_memory_address (ptr_mode
, offset_rtx
);
6672 offset_rtx
= convert_to_mode (ptr_mode
, offset_rtx
, 0);
6676 /* A constant address in OP0 can have VOIDmode, we must not try
6677 to call force_reg for that case. Avoid that case. */
6678 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == MEM
6679 && GET_MODE (op0
) == BLKmode
6680 && GET_MODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) != VOIDmode
6682 && (bitpos
% bitsize
) == 0
6683 && (bitsize
% GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1
)) == 0
6684 && (alignment
* BITS_PER_UNIT
) == GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode1
))
6686 rtx temp
= change_address (op0
, mode1
,
6687 plus_constant (XEXP (op0
, 0),
6690 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (temp
, 0)) == REG
)
6693 op0
= change_address (op0
, mode1
,
6694 force_reg (GET_MODE (XEXP (temp
, 0)),
6700 op0
= change_address (op0
, VOIDmode
,
6701 gen_rtx_PLUS (ptr_mode
, XEXP (op0
, 0),
6702 force_reg (ptr_mode
,
6706 /* Don't forget about volatility even if this is a bitfield. */
6707 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == MEM
&& volatilep
&& ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0
))
6709 op0
= copy_rtx (op0
);
6710 MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0
) = 1;
6713 /* Check the access. */
6714 if (current_function_check_memory_usage
&& GET_CODE (op0
) == MEM
)
6716 enum memory_use_mode memory_usage
;
6717 memory_usage
= get_memory_usage_from_modifier (modifier
);
6719 if (memory_usage
!= MEMORY_USE_DONT
)
6724 to
= plus_constant (XEXP (op0
, 0), (bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
));
6725 size
= (bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
) + bitsize
+ BITS_PER_UNIT
- 1;
6727 /* Check the access right of the pointer. */
6728 if (size
> BITS_PER_UNIT
)
6729 emit_library_call (chkr_check_addr_libfunc
, 1, VOIDmode
, 3,
6731 GEN_INT (size
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
),
6732 TYPE_MODE (sizetype
),
6733 GEN_INT (memory_usage
),
6734 TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node
));
6738 /* In cases where an aligned union has an unaligned object
6739 as a field, we might be extracting a BLKmode value from
6740 an integer-mode (e.g., SImode) object. Handle this case
6741 by doing the extract into an object as wide as the field
6742 (which we know to be the width of a basic mode), then
6743 storing into memory, and changing the mode to BLKmode.
6744 If we ultimately want the address (EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS or
6745 EXPAND_INITIALIZER), then we must not copy to a temporary. */
6746 if (mode1
== VOIDmode
6747 || GET_CODE (op0
) == REG
|| GET_CODE (op0
) == SUBREG
6748 || (modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
6749 && modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
6750 && ((mode1
!= BLKmode
&& ! direct_load
[(int) mode1
]
6751 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) != MODE_COMPLEX_INT
6752 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) != MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT
)
6753 /* If the field isn't aligned enough to fetch as a memref,
6754 fetch it as a bit field. */
6755 || (mode1
!= BLKmode
6756 && SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode1
, alignment
)
6757 && ((TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (tem
))
6758 < (unsigned int) GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
))
6759 || (bitpos
% GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode
) != 0)))
6760 /* If the type and the field are a constant size and the
6761 size of the type isn't the same size as the bitfield,
6762 we must use bitfield operations. */
6764 && (TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))
6766 && ((TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))
6768 || (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)))
6770 || (modifier
!= EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
6771 && modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
6773 && SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode
, alignment
)
6774 && (TYPE_ALIGN (type
) > alignment
* BITS_PER_UNIT
6775 || bitpos
% TYPE_ALIGN (type
) != 0)))
6777 enum machine_mode ext_mode
= mode
;
6779 if (ext_mode
== BLKmode
6780 && ! (target
!= 0 && GET_CODE (op0
) == MEM
6781 && GET_CODE (target
) == MEM
6782 && bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
== 0))
6783 ext_mode
= mode_for_size (bitsize
, MODE_INT
, 1);
6785 if (ext_mode
== BLKmode
)
6787 /* In this case, BITPOS must start at a byte boundary and
6788 TARGET, if specified, must be a MEM. */
6789 if (GET_CODE (op0
) != MEM
6790 || (target
!= 0 && GET_CODE (target
) != MEM
)
6791 || bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
!= 0)
6794 op0
= change_address (op0
, VOIDmode
,
6795 plus_constant (XEXP (op0
, 0),
6796 bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
));
6798 target
= assign_temp (type
, 0, 1, 1);
6800 emit_block_move (target
, op0
,
6801 GEN_INT ((bitsize
+ BITS_PER_UNIT
- 1)
6808 op0
= validize_mem (op0
);
6810 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == MEM
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) == REG
)
6811 mark_reg_pointer (XEXP (op0
, 0), alignment
);
6813 op0
= extract_bit_field (op0
, bitsize
, bitpos
,
6814 unsignedp
, target
, ext_mode
, ext_mode
,
6816 int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (tem
)));
6818 /* If the result is a record type and BITSIZE is narrower than
6819 the mode of OP0, an integral mode, and this is a big endian
6820 machine, we must put the field into the high-order bits. */
6821 if (TREE_CODE (type
) == RECORD_TYPE
&& BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
6822 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0
)) == MODE_INT
6823 && bitsize
< GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0
)))
6824 op0
= expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR
, GET_MODE (op0
), op0
,
6825 size_int (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0
))
6829 if (mode
== BLKmode
)
6831 rtx
new = assign_stack_temp (ext_mode
,
6832 bitsize
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
, 0);
6834 emit_move_insn (new, op0
);
6835 op0
= copy_rtx (new);
6836 PUT_MODE (op0
, BLKmode
);
6837 MEM_SET_IN_STRUCT_P (op0
, 1);
6843 /* If the result is BLKmode, use that to access the object
6845 if (mode
== BLKmode
)
6848 /* Get a reference to just this component. */
6849 if (modifier
== EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
6850 || modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
|| modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
6851 op0
= gen_rtx_MEM (mode1
, plus_constant (XEXP (op0
, 0),
6852 (bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
)));
6854 op0
= change_address (op0
, mode1
,
6855 plus_constant (XEXP (op0
, 0),
6856 (bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
)));
6858 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == MEM
)
6859 MEM_ALIAS_SET (op0
) = get_alias_set (exp
);
6861 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) == REG
)
6862 mark_reg_pointer (XEXP (op0
, 0), alignment
);
6864 MEM_SET_IN_STRUCT_P (op0
, 1);
6865 MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0
) |= volatilep
;
6866 if (mode
== mode1
|| mode1
== BLKmode
|| mode1
== tmode
6867 || modifier
== EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
6868 || modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
6870 else if (target
== 0)
6871 target
= gen_reg_rtx (tmode
!= VOIDmode
? tmode
: mode
);
6873 convert_move (target
, op0
, unsignedp
);
6877 /* Intended for a reference to a buffer of a file-object in Pascal.
6878 But it's not certain that a special tree code will really be
6879 necessary for these. INDIRECT_REF might work for them. */
6885 /* Pascal set IN expression.
6888 rlo = set_low - (set_low%bits_per_word);
6889 the_word = set [ (index - rlo)/bits_per_word ];
6890 bit_index = index % bits_per_word;
6891 bitmask = 1 << bit_index;
6892 return !!(the_word & bitmask); */
6894 tree set
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
6895 tree index
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
6896 int iunsignedp
= TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (index
));
6897 tree set_type
= TREE_TYPE (set
);
6898 tree set_low_bound
= TYPE_MIN_VALUE (TYPE_DOMAIN (set_type
));
6899 tree set_high_bound
= TYPE_MAX_VALUE (TYPE_DOMAIN (set_type
));
6900 rtx index_val
= expand_expr (index
, 0, VOIDmode
, 0);
6901 rtx lo_r
= expand_expr (set_low_bound
, 0, VOIDmode
, 0);
6902 rtx hi_r
= expand_expr (set_high_bound
, 0, VOIDmode
, 0);
6903 rtx setval
= expand_expr (set
, 0, VOIDmode
, 0);
6904 rtx setaddr
= XEXP (setval
, 0);
6905 enum machine_mode index_mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (index
));
6907 rtx diff
, quo
, rem
, addr
, bit
, result
;
6909 preexpand_calls (exp
);
6911 /* If domain is empty, answer is no. Likewise if index is constant
6912 and out of bounds. */
6913 if (((TREE_CODE (set_high_bound
) == INTEGER_CST
6914 && TREE_CODE (set_low_bound
) == INTEGER_CST
6915 && tree_int_cst_lt (set_high_bound
, set_low_bound
))
6916 || (TREE_CODE (index
) == INTEGER_CST
6917 && TREE_CODE (set_low_bound
) == INTEGER_CST
6918 && tree_int_cst_lt (index
, set_low_bound
))
6919 || (TREE_CODE (set_high_bound
) == INTEGER_CST
6920 && TREE_CODE (index
) == INTEGER_CST
6921 && tree_int_cst_lt (set_high_bound
, index
))))
6925 target
= gen_reg_rtx (tmode
!= VOIDmode
? tmode
: mode
);
6927 /* If we get here, we have to generate the code for both cases
6928 (in range and out of range). */
6930 op0
= gen_label_rtx ();
6931 op1
= gen_label_rtx ();
6933 if (! (GET_CODE (index_val
) == CONST_INT
6934 && GET_CODE (lo_r
) == CONST_INT
))
6936 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (index_val
, lo_r
, LT
, NULL_RTX
,
6937 GET_MODE (index_val
), iunsignedp
, 0, op1
);
6940 if (! (GET_CODE (index_val
) == CONST_INT
6941 && GET_CODE (hi_r
) == CONST_INT
))
6943 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (index_val
, hi_r
, GT
, NULL_RTX
,
6944 GET_MODE (index_val
), iunsignedp
, 0, op1
);
6947 /* Calculate the element number of bit zero in the first word
6949 if (GET_CODE (lo_r
) == CONST_INT
)
6950 rlow
= GEN_INT (INTVAL (lo_r
)
6951 & ~ ((HOST_WIDE_INT
) 1 << BITS_PER_UNIT
));
6953 rlow
= expand_binop (index_mode
, and_optab
, lo_r
,
6954 GEN_INT (~((HOST_WIDE_INT
) 1 << BITS_PER_UNIT
)),
6955 NULL_RTX
, iunsignedp
, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
6957 diff
= expand_binop (index_mode
, sub_optab
, index_val
, rlow
,
6958 NULL_RTX
, iunsignedp
, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
6960 quo
= expand_divmod (0, TRUNC_DIV_EXPR
, index_mode
, diff
,
6961 GEN_INT (BITS_PER_UNIT
), NULL_RTX
, iunsignedp
);
6962 rem
= expand_divmod (1, TRUNC_MOD_EXPR
, index_mode
, index_val
,
6963 GEN_INT (BITS_PER_UNIT
), NULL_RTX
, iunsignedp
);
6965 addr
= memory_address (byte_mode
,
6966 expand_binop (index_mode
, add_optab
, diff
,
6967 setaddr
, NULL_RTX
, iunsignedp
,
6970 /* Extract the bit we want to examine */
6971 bit
= expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR
, byte_mode
,
6972 gen_rtx_MEM (byte_mode
, addr
),
6973 make_tree (TREE_TYPE (index
), rem
),
6975 result
= expand_binop (byte_mode
, and_optab
, bit
, const1_rtx
,
6976 GET_MODE (target
) == byte_mode
? target
: 0,
6977 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
6979 if (result
!= target
)
6980 convert_move (target
, result
, 1);
6982 /* Output the code to handle the out-of-range case. */
6985 emit_move_insn (target
, const0_rtx
);
6990 case WITH_CLEANUP_EXPR
:
6991 if (RTL_EXPR_RTL (exp
) == 0)
6994 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), target
, tmode
, ro_modifier
);
6995 expand_decl_cleanup (NULL_TREE
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2));
6997 /* That's it for this cleanup. */
6998 TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2) = 0;
7000 return RTL_EXPR_RTL (exp
);
7002 case CLEANUP_POINT_EXPR
:
7004 /* Start a new binding layer that will keep track of all cleanup
7005 actions to be performed. */
7006 expand_start_bindings (2);
7008 target_temp_slot_level
= temp_slot_level
;
7010 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), target
, tmode
, ro_modifier
);
7011 /* If we're going to use this value, load it up now. */
7013 op0
= force_not_mem (op0
);
7014 preserve_temp_slots (op0
);
7015 expand_end_bindings (NULL_TREE
, 0, 0);
7020 /* Check for a built-in function. */
7021 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)) == ADDR_EXPR
7022 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0))
7024 && DECL_BUILT_IN (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0)))
7025 return expand_builtin (exp
, target
, subtarget
, tmode
, ignore
);
7027 /* If this call was expanded already by preexpand_calls,
7028 just return the result we got. */
7029 if (CALL_EXPR_RTL (exp
) != 0)
7030 return CALL_EXPR_RTL (exp
);
7032 return expand_call (exp
, target
, ignore
);
7034 case NON_LVALUE_EXPR
:
7037 case REFERENCE_EXPR
:
7038 if (TREE_CODE (type
) == UNION_TYPE
)
7040 tree valtype
= TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0));
7042 /* If both input and output are BLKmode, this conversion
7043 isn't actually doing anything unless we need to make the
7044 alignment stricter. */
7045 if (mode
== BLKmode
&& TYPE_MODE (valtype
) == BLKmode
7046 && (TYPE_ALIGN (type
) <= TYPE_ALIGN (valtype
)
7047 || TYPE_ALIGN (type
) >= BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
))
7048 return expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), target
, tmode
,
7053 if (mode
!= BLKmode
)
7054 target
= gen_reg_rtx (tmode
!= VOIDmode
? tmode
: mode
);
7056 target
= assign_temp (type
, 0, 1, 1);
7059 if (GET_CODE (target
) == MEM
)
7060 /* Store data into beginning of memory target. */
7061 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0),
7062 change_address (target
, TYPE_MODE (valtype
), 0), 0);
7064 else if (GET_CODE (target
) == REG
)
7065 /* Store this field into a union of the proper type. */
7066 store_field (target
,
7067 MIN ((int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE
7068 (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)))
7070 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
)),
7071 0, TYPE_MODE (valtype
), TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0),
7072 VOIDmode
, 0, 1, int_size_in_bytes (type
), 0);
7076 /* Return the entire union. */
7080 if (mode
== TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))))
7082 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), target
, VOIDmode
,
7085 /* If the signedness of the conversion differs and OP0 is
7086 a promoted SUBREG, clear that indication since we now
7087 have to do the proper extension. */
7088 if (TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))) != unsignedp
7089 && GET_CODE (op0
) == SUBREG
)
7090 SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (op0
) = 0;
7095 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), NULL_RTX
, mode
, 0);
7096 if (GET_MODE (op0
) == mode
)
7099 /* If OP0 is a constant, just convert it into the proper mode. */
7100 if (CONSTANT_P (op0
))
7102 convert_modes (mode
, TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))),
7103 op0
, TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))));
7105 if (modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
7106 return gen_rtx_fmt_e (unsignedp
? ZERO_EXTEND
: SIGN_EXTEND
, mode
, op0
);
7110 convert_to_mode (mode
, op0
,
7111 TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))));
7113 convert_move (target
, op0
,
7114 TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))));
7118 /* We come here from MINUS_EXPR when the second operand is a
7121 this_optab
= add_optab
;
7123 /* If we are adding a constant, an RTL_EXPR that is sp, fp, or ap, and
7124 something else, make sure we add the register to the constant and
7125 then to the other thing. This case can occur during strength
7126 reduction and doing it this way will produce better code if the
7127 frame pointer or argument pointer is eliminated.
7129 fold-const.c will ensure that the constant is always in the inner
7130 PLUS_EXPR, so the only case we need to do anything about is if
7131 sp, ap, or fp is our second argument, in which case we must swap
7132 the innermost first argument and our second argument. */
7134 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)) == PLUS_EXPR
7135 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 1)) == INTEGER_CST
7136 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)) == RTL_EXPR
7137 && (RTL_EXPR_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)) == frame_pointer_rtx
7138 || RTL_EXPR_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)) == stack_pointer_rtx
7139 || RTL_EXPR_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)) == arg_pointer_rtx
))
7141 tree t
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
7143 TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1) = TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0);
7144 TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0) = t
;
7147 /* If the result is to be ptr_mode and we are adding an integer to
7148 something, we might be forming a constant. So try to use
7149 plus_constant. If it produces a sum and we can't accept it,
7150 use force_operand. This allows P = &ARR[const] to generate
7151 efficient code on machines where a SYMBOL_REF is not a valid
7154 If this is an EXPAND_SUM call, always return the sum. */
7155 if (modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
|| modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
7156 || mode
== ptr_mode
)
7158 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)) == INTEGER_CST
7159 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
7160 && TREE_CONSTANT (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)))
7164 op1
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), subtarget
, VOIDmode
,
7166 /* Use immed_double_const to ensure that the constant is
7167 truncated according to the mode of OP1, then sign extended
7168 to a HOST_WIDE_INT. Using the constant directly can result
7169 in non-canonical RTL in a 64x32 cross compile. */
7171 = immed_double_const (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)),
7173 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1))));
7174 op1
= plus_constant (op1
, INTVAL (constant_part
));
7175 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_SUM
&& modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
7176 op1
= force_operand (op1
, target
);
7180 else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
7181 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT
7182 && TREE_CONSTANT (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)))
7186 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), subtarget
, VOIDmode
,
7188 if (! CONSTANT_P (op0
))
7190 op1
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), NULL_RTX
,
7191 VOIDmode
, modifier
);
7192 /* Don't go to both_summands if modifier
7193 says it's not right to return a PLUS. */
7194 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_SUM
&& modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
7198 /* Use immed_double_const to ensure that the constant is
7199 truncated according to the mode of OP1, then sign extended
7200 to a HOST_WIDE_INT. Using the constant directly can result
7201 in non-canonical RTL in a 64x32 cross compile. */
7203 = immed_double_const (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)),
7205 TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))));
7206 op0
= plus_constant (op0
, INTVAL (constant_part
));
7207 if (modifier
!= EXPAND_SUM
&& modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
7208 op0
= force_operand (op0
, target
);
7213 /* No sense saving up arithmetic to be done
7214 if it's all in the wrong mode to form part of an address.
7215 And force_operand won't know whether to sign-extend or
7217 if ((modifier
!= EXPAND_SUM
&& modifier
!= EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
7218 || mode
!= ptr_mode
)
7221 preexpand_calls (exp
);
7222 if (! safe_from_p (subtarget
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), 1))
7225 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), subtarget
, VOIDmode
, ro_modifier
);
7226 op1
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, ro_modifier
);
7229 /* Make sure any term that's a sum with a constant comes last. */
7230 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == PLUS
7231 && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (op0
, 1)))
7237 /* If adding to a sum including a constant,
7238 associate it to put the constant outside. */
7239 if (GET_CODE (op1
) == PLUS
7240 && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (op1
, 1)))
7242 rtx constant_term
= const0_rtx
;
7244 temp
= simplify_binary_operation (PLUS
, mode
, XEXP (op1
, 0), op0
);
7247 /* Ensure that MULT comes first if there is one. */
7248 else if (GET_CODE (op0
) == MULT
)
7249 op0
= gen_rtx_PLUS (mode
, op0
, XEXP (op1
, 0));
7251 op0
= gen_rtx_PLUS (mode
, XEXP (op1
, 0), op0
);
7253 /* Let's also eliminate constants from op0 if possible. */
7254 op0
= eliminate_constant_term (op0
, &constant_term
);
7256 /* CONSTANT_TERM and XEXP (op1, 1) are known to be constant, so
7257 their sum should be a constant. Form it into OP1, since the
7258 result we want will then be OP0 + OP1. */
7260 temp
= simplify_binary_operation (PLUS
, mode
, constant_term
,
7265 op1
= gen_rtx_PLUS (mode
, constant_term
, XEXP (op1
, 1));
7268 /* Put a constant term last and put a multiplication first. */
7269 if (CONSTANT_P (op0
) || GET_CODE (op1
) == MULT
)
7270 temp
= op1
, op1
= op0
, op0
= temp
;
7272 temp
= simplify_binary_operation (PLUS
, mode
, op0
, op1
);
7273 return temp
? temp
: gen_rtx_PLUS (mode
, op0
, op1
);
7276 /* For initializers, we are allowed to return a MINUS of two
7277 symbolic constants. Here we handle all cases when both operands
7279 /* Handle difference of two symbolic constants,
7280 for the sake of an initializer. */
7281 if ((modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
|| modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
7282 && really_constant_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))
7283 && really_constant_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)))
7285 rtx op0
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), NULL_RTX
,
7286 VOIDmode
, ro_modifier
);
7287 rtx op1
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), NULL_RTX
,
7288 VOIDmode
, ro_modifier
);
7290 /* If the last operand is a CONST_INT, use plus_constant of
7291 the negated constant. Else make the MINUS. */
7292 if (GET_CODE (op1
) == CONST_INT
)
7293 return plus_constant (op0
, - INTVAL (op1
));
7295 return gen_rtx_MINUS (mode
, op0
, op1
);
7297 /* Convert A - const to A + (-const). */
7298 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
)
7300 tree negated
= fold (build1 (NEGATE_EXPR
, type
,
7301 TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)));
7303 if (TREE_UNSIGNED (type
) || TREE_OVERFLOW (negated
))
7304 /* If we can't negate the constant in TYPE, leave it alone and
7305 expand_binop will negate it for us. We used to try to do it
7306 here in the signed version of TYPE, but that doesn't work
7307 on POINTER_TYPEs. */;
7310 exp
= build (PLUS_EXPR
, type
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), negated
);
7314 this_optab
= sub_optab
;
7318 preexpand_calls (exp
);
7319 /* If first operand is constant, swap them.
7320 Thus the following special case checks need only
7321 check the second operand. */
7322 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)) == INTEGER_CST
)
7324 register tree t1
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
7325 TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0) = TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
7326 TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1) = t1
;
7329 /* Attempt to return something suitable for generating an
7330 indexed address, for machines that support that. */
7332 if (modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
&& mode
== ptr_mode
7333 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
7334 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode
) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
7336 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), subtarget
, VOIDmode
,
7339 /* Apply distributive law if OP0 is x+c. */
7340 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == PLUS
7341 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 1)) == CONST_INT
)
7346 (mode
, XEXP (op0
, 0),
7347 GEN_INT (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)))),
7348 GEN_INT (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1))
7349 * INTVAL (XEXP (op0
, 1))));
7351 if (GET_CODE (op0
) != REG
)
7352 op0
= force_operand (op0
, NULL_RTX
);
7353 if (GET_CODE (op0
) != REG
)
7354 op0
= copy_to_mode_reg (mode
, op0
);
7357 gen_rtx_MULT (mode
, op0
,
7358 GEN_INT (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1))));
7361 if (! safe_from_p (subtarget
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), 1))
7364 /* Check for multiplying things that have been extended
7365 from a narrower type. If this machine supports multiplying
7366 in that narrower type with a result in the desired type,
7367 do it that way, and avoid the explicit type-conversion. */
7368 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)) == NOP_EXPR
7369 && TREE_CODE (type
) == INTEGER_TYPE
7370 && (TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0)))
7371 < TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))))
7372 && ((TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
7373 && int_fits_type_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1),
7374 TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0)))
7375 /* Don't use a widening multiply if a shift will do. */
7376 && ((GET_MODE_BITSIZE (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1))))
7377 > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
7378 || exact_log2 (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1))) < 0))
7380 (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)) == NOP_EXPR
7381 && (TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), 0)))
7383 TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0))))
7384 /* If both operands are extended, they must either both
7385 be zero-extended or both be sign-extended. */
7386 && (TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), 0)))
7388 TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0)))))))
7390 enum machine_mode innermode
7391 = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0)));
7392 optab other_optab
= (TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0)))
7393 ? smul_widen_optab
: umul_widen_optab
);
7394 this_optab
= (TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0)))
7395 ? umul_widen_optab
: smul_widen_optab
);
7396 if (mode
== GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (innermode
))
7398 if (this_optab
->handlers
[(int) mode
].insn_code
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
)
7400 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0),
7401 NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
7402 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
)
7403 op1
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), NULL_RTX
,
7406 op1
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), 0),
7407 NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
7410 else if (other_optab
->handlers
[(int) mode
].insn_code
!= CODE_FOR_nothing
7411 && innermode
== word_mode
)
7414 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0),
7415 NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
7416 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
)
7417 op1
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), NULL_RTX
,
7420 op1
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), 0),
7421 NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
7422 temp
= expand_binop (mode
, other_optab
, op0
, op1
, target
,
7423 unsignedp
, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
7424 htem
= expand_mult_highpart_adjust (innermode
,
7425 gen_highpart (innermode
, temp
),
7427 gen_highpart (innermode
, temp
),
7429 emit_move_insn (gen_highpart (innermode
, temp
), htem
);
7434 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), subtarget
, VOIDmode
, 0);
7435 op1
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
7436 return expand_mult (mode
, op0
, op1
, target
, unsignedp
);
7438 case TRUNC_DIV_EXPR
:
7439 case FLOOR_DIV_EXPR
:
7441 case ROUND_DIV_EXPR
:
7442 case EXACT_DIV_EXPR
:
7443 preexpand_calls (exp
);
7444 if (! safe_from_p (subtarget
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), 1))
7446 /* Possible optimization: compute the dividend with EXPAND_SUM
7447 then if the divisor is constant can optimize the case
7448 where some terms of the dividend have coeffs divisible by it. */
7449 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), subtarget
, VOIDmode
, 0);
7450 op1
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
7451 return expand_divmod (0, code
, mode
, op0
, op1
, target
, unsignedp
);
7454 this_optab
= flodiv_optab
;
7457 case TRUNC_MOD_EXPR
:
7458 case FLOOR_MOD_EXPR
:
7460 case ROUND_MOD_EXPR
:
7461 preexpand_calls (exp
);
7462 if (! safe_from_p (subtarget
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), 1))
7464 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), subtarget
, VOIDmode
, 0);
7465 op1
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
7466 return expand_divmod (1, code
, mode
, op0
, op1
, target
, unsignedp
);
7468 case FIX_ROUND_EXPR
:
7469 case FIX_FLOOR_EXPR
:
7471 abort (); /* Not used for C. */
7473 case FIX_TRUNC_EXPR
:
7474 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
7476 target
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
7477 expand_fix (target
, op0
, unsignedp
);
7481 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
7483 target
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
7484 /* expand_float can't figure out what to do if FROM has VOIDmode.
7485 So give it the correct mode. With -O, cse will optimize this. */
7486 if (GET_MODE (op0
) == VOIDmode
)
7487 op0
= copy_to_mode_reg (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))),
7489 expand_float (target
, op0
,
7490 TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))));
7494 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), subtarget
, VOIDmode
, 0);
7495 temp
= expand_unop (mode
, neg_optab
, op0
, target
, 0);
7501 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), subtarget
, VOIDmode
, 0);
7503 /* Handle complex values specially. */
7504 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_COMPLEX_INT
7505 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT
)
7506 return expand_complex_abs (mode
, op0
, target
, unsignedp
);
7508 /* Unsigned abs is simply the operand. Testing here means we don't
7509 risk generating incorrect code below. */
7510 if (TREE_UNSIGNED (type
))
7513 return expand_abs (mode
, op0
, target
,
7514 safe_from_p (target
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 1));
7518 target
= original_target
;
7519 if (target
== 0 || ! safe_from_p (target
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), 1)
7520 || (GET_CODE (target
) == MEM
&& MEM_VOLATILE_P (target
))
7521 || GET_MODE (target
) != mode
7522 || (GET_CODE (target
) == REG
7523 && REGNO (target
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
))
7524 target
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
7525 op1
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
7526 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), target
, VOIDmode
, 0);
7528 /* First try to do it with a special MIN or MAX instruction.
7529 If that does not win, use a conditional jump to select the proper
7531 this_optab
= (TREE_UNSIGNED (type
)
7532 ? (code
== MIN_EXPR
? umin_optab
: umax_optab
)
7533 : (code
== MIN_EXPR
? smin_optab
: smax_optab
));
7535 temp
= expand_binop (mode
, this_optab
, op0
, op1
, target
, unsignedp
,
7540 /* At this point, a MEM target is no longer useful; we will get better
7543 if (GET_CODE (target
) == MEM
)
7544 target
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
7547 emit_move_insn (target
, op0
);
7549 op0
= gen_label_rtx ();
7551 /* If this mode is an integer too wide to compare properly,
7552 compare word by word. Rely on cse to optimize constant cases. */
7553 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
7554 && ! can_compare_p (GE
, mode
, ccp_jump
))
7556 if (code
== MAX_EXPR
)
7557 do_jump_by_parts_greater_rtx (mode
, TREE_UNSIGNED (type
),
7558 target
, op1
, NULL_RTX
, op0
);
7560 do_jump_by_parts_greater_rtx (mode
, TREE_UNSIGNED (type
),
7561 op1
, target
, NULL_RTX
, op0
);
7565 int unsignedp
= TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)));
7566 do_compare_rtx_and_jump (target
, op1
, code
== MAX_EXPR
? GE
: LE
,
7567 unsignedp
, mode
, NULL_RTX
, 0, NULL_RTX
,
7570 emit_move_insn (target
, op1
);
7575 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), subtarget
, VOIDmode
, 0);
7576 temp
= expand_unop (mode
, one_cmpl_optab
, op0
, target
, 1);
7582 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), subtarget
, VOIDmode
, 0);
7583 temp
= expand_unop (mode
, ffs_optab
, op0
, target
, 1);
7588 /* ??? Can optimize bitwise operations with one arg constant.
7589 Can optimize (a bitwise1 n) bitwise2 (a bitwise3 b)
7590 and (a bitwise1 b) bitwise2 b (etc)
7591 but that is probably not worth while. */
7593 /* BIT_AND_EXPR is for bitwise anding. TRUTH_AND_EXPR is for anding two
7594 boolean values when we want in all cases to compute both of them. In
7595 general it is fastest to do TRUTH_AND_EXPR by computing both operands
7596 as actual zero-or-1 values and then bitwise anding. In cases where
7597 there cannot be any side effects, better code would be made by
7598 treating TRUTH_AND_EXPR like TRUTH_ANDIF_EXPR; but the question is
7599 how to recognize those cases. */
7601 case TRUTH_AND_EXPR
:
7603 this_optab
= and_optab
;
7608 this_optab
= ior_optab
;
7611 case TRUTH_XOR_EXPR
:
7613 this_optab
= xor_optab
;
7620 preexpand_calls (exp
);
7621 if (! safe_from_p (subtarget
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), 1))
7623 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), subtarget
, VOIDmode
, 0);
7624 return expand_shift (code
, mode
, op0
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), target
,
7627 /* Could determine the answer when only additive constants differ. Also,
7628 the addition of one can be handled by changing the condition. */
7635 case UNORDERED_EXPR
:
7642 preexpand_calls (exp
);
7643 temp
= do_store_flag (exp
, target
, tmode
!= VOIDmode
? tmode
: mode
, 0);
7647 /* For foo != 0, load foo, and if it is nonzero load 1 instead. */
7648 if (code
== NE_EXPR
&& integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1))
7650 && GET_CODE (original_target
) == REG
7651 && (GET_MODE (original_target
)
7652 == TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)))))
7654 temp
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), original_target
,
7657 if (temp
!= original_target
)
7658 temp
= copy_to_reg (temp
);
7660 op1
= gen_label_rtx ();
7661 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (temp
, const0_rtx
, EQ
, NULL_RTX
,
7662 GET_MODE (temp
), unsignedp
, 0, op1
);
7663 emit_move_insn (temp
, const1_rtx
);
7668 /* If no set-flag instruction, must generate a conditional
7669 store into a temporary variable. Drop through
7670 and handle this like && and ||. */
7672 case TRUTH_ANDIF_EXPR
:
7673 case TRUTH_ORIF_EXPR
:
7675 && (target
== 0 || ! safe_from_p (target
, exp
, 1)
7676 /* Make sure we don't have a hard reg (such as function's return
7677 value) live across basic blocks, if not optimizing. */
7678 || (!optimize
&& GET_CODE (target
) == REG
7679 && REGNO (target
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)))
7680 target
= gen_reg_rtx (tmode
!= VOIDmode
? tmode
: mode
);
7683 emit_clr_insn (target
);
7685 op1
= gen_label_rtx ();
7686 jumpifnot (exp
, op1
);
7689 emit_0_to_1_insn (target
);
7692 return ignore
? const0_rtx
: target
;
7694 case TRUTH_NOT_EXPR
:
7695 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), target
, VOIDmode
, 0);
7696 /* The parser is careful to generate TRUTH_NOT_EXPR
7697 only with operands that are always zero or one. */
7698 temp
= expand_binop (mode
, xor_optab
, op0
, const1_rtx
,
7699 target
, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
7705 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, 0);
7707 return expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1),
7708 (ignore
? const0_rtx
: target
),
7712 /* If we would have a "singleton" (see below) were it not for a
7713 conversion in each arm, bring that conversion back out. */
7714 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)) == NOP_EXPR
7715 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2)) == NOP_EXPR
7716 && (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), 0))
7717 == TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2), 0))))
7719 tree
true = TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), 0);
7720 tree
false = TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2), 0);
7722 if ((TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (true)) == '2'
7723 && operand_equal_p (false, TREE_OPERAND (true, 0), 0))
7724 || (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (false)) == '2'
7725 && operand_equal_p (true, TREE_OPERAND (false, 0), 0))
7726 || (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (true)) == '1'
7727 && operand_equal_p (false, TREE_OPERAND (true, 0), 0))
7728 || (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (false)) == '1'
7729 && operand_equal_p (true, TREE_OPERAND (false, 0), 0)))
7730 return expand_expr (build1 (NOP_EXPR
, type
,
7731 build (COND_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (true),
7732 TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0),
7734 target
, tmode
, modifier
);
7738 /* Note that COND_EXPRs whose type is a structure or union
7739 are required to be constructed to contain assignments of
7740 a temporary variable, so that we can evaluate them here
7741 for side effect only. If type is void, we must do likewise. */
7743 /* If an arm of the branch requires a cleanup,
7744 only that cleanup is performed. */
7747 tree binary_op
= 0, unary_op
= 0;
7749 /* If this is (A ? 1 : 0) and A is a condition, just evaluate it and
7750 convert it to our mode, if necessary. */
7751 if (integer_onep (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1))
7752 && integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2))
7753 && TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))) == '<')
7757 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
,
7762 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), target
, mode
, ro_modifier
);
7763 if (GET_MODE (op0
) == mode
)
7767 target
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
7768 convert_move (target
, op0
, unsignedp
);
7772 /* Check for X ? A + B : A. If we have this, we can copy A to the
7773 output and conditionally add B. Similarly for unary operations.
7774 Don't do this if X has side-effects because those side effects
7775 might affect A or B and the "?" operation is a sequence point in
7776 ANSI. (operand_equal_p tests for side effects.) */
7778 if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1))) == '2'
7779 && operand_equal_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2),
7780 TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), 0), 0))
7781 singleton
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2), binary_op
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
7782 else if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2))) == '2'
7783 && operand_equal_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1),
7784 TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2), 0), 0))
7785 singleton
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), binary_op
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2);
7786 else if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1))) == '1'
7787 && operand_equal_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2),
7788 TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), 0), 0))
7789 singleton
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2), unary_op
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
7790 else if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2))) == '1'
7791 && operand_equal_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1),
7792 TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2), 0), 0))
7793 singleton
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), unary_op
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2);
7795 /* If we are not to produce a result, we have no target. Otherwise,
7796 if a target was specified use it; it will not be used as an
7797 intermediate target unless it is safe. If no target, use a
7802 else if (original_target
7803 && (safe_from_p (original_target
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 1)
7804 || (singleton
&& GET_CODE (original_target
) == REG
7805 && REGNO (original_target
) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
7806 && original_target
== var_rtx (singleton
)))
7807 && GET_MODE (original_target
) == mode
7808 #ifdef HAVE_conditional_move
7809 && (! can_conditionally_move_p (mode
)
7810 || GET_CODE (original_target
) == REG
7811 || TREE_ADDRESSABLE (type
))
7813 && ! (GET_CODE (original_target
) == MEM
7814 && MEM_VOLATILE_P (original_target
)))
7815 temp
= original_target
;
7816 else if (TREE_ADDRESSABLE (type
))
7819 temp
= assign_temp (type
, 0, 0, 1);
7821 /* If we had X ? A + C : A, with C a constant power of 2, and we can
7822 do the test of X as a store-flag operation, do this as
7823 A + ((X != 0) << log C). Similarly for other simple binary
7824 operators. Only do for C == 1 if BRANCH_COST is low. */
7825 if (temp
&& singleton
&& binary_op
7826 && (TREE_CODE (binary_op
) == PLUS_EXPR
7827 || TREE_CODE (binary_op
) == MINUS_EXPR
7828 || TREE_CODE (binary_op
) == BIT_IOR_EXPR
7829 || TREE_CODE (binary_op
) == BIT_XOR_EXPR
)
7830 && (BRANCH_COST
>= 3 ? integer_pow2p (TREE_OPERAND (binary_op
, 1))
7831 : integer_onep (TREE_OPERAND (binary_op
, 1)))
7832 && TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))) == '<')
7835 optab boptab
= (TREE_CODE (binary_op
) == PLUS_EXPR
? add_optab
7836 : TREE_CODE (binary_op
) == MINUS_EXPR
? sub_optab
7837 : TREE_CODE (binary_op
) == BIT_IOR_EXPR
? ior_optab
7840 /* If we had X ? A : A + 1, do this as A + (X == 0).
7842 We have to invert the truth value here and then put it
7843 back later if do_store_flag fails. We cannot simply copy
7844 TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0) to another variable and modify that
7845 because invert_truthvalue can modify the tree pointed to
7847 if (singleton
== TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1))
7848 TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)
7849 = invert_truthvalue (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0));
7851 result
= do_store_flag (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0),
7852 (safe_from_p (temp
, singleton
, 1)
7854 mode
, BRANCH_COST
<= 1);
7856 if (result
!= 0 && ! integer_onep (TREE_OPERAND (binary_op
, 1)))
7857 result
= expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR
, mode
, result
,
7858 build_int_2 (tree_log2
7862 (safe_from_p (temp
, singleton
, 1)
7863 ? temp
: NULL_RTX
), 0);
7867 op1
= expand_expr (singleton
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
7868 return expand_binop (mode
, boptab
, op1
, result
, temp
,
7869 unsignedp
, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
7871 else if (singleton
== TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1))
7872 TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)
7873 = invert_truthvalue (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0));
7876 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
7878 op0
= gen_label_rtx ();
7880 if (singleton
&& ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)))
7884 /* If the target conflicts with the other operand of the
7885 binary op, we can't use it. Also, we can't use the target
7886 if it is a hard register, because evaluating the condition
7887 might clobber it. */
7889 && ! safe_from_p (temp
, TREE_OPERAND (binary_op
, 1), 1))
7890 || (GET_CODE (temp
) == REG
7891 && REGNO (temp
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
))
7892 temp
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
7893 store_expr (singleton
, temp
, 0);
7896 expand_expr (singleton
,
7897 ignore
? const0_rtx
: NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
7898 if (singleton
== TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1))
7899 jumpif (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), op0
);
7901 jumpifnot (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), op0
);
7903 start_cleanup_deferral ();
7904 if (binary_op
&& temp
== 0)
7905 /* Just touch the other operand. */
7906 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (binary_op
, 1),
7907 ignore
? const0_rtx
: NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
7909 store_expr (build (TREE_CODE (binary_op
), type
,
7910 make_tree (type
, temp
),
7911 TREE_OPERAND (binary_op
, 1)),
7914 store_expr (build1 (TREE_CODE (unary_op
), type
,
7915 make_tree (type
, temp
)),
7919 /* Check for A op 0 ? A : FOO and A op 0 ? FOO : A where OP is any
7920 comparison operator. If we have one of these cases, set the
7921 output to A, branch on A (cse will merge these two references),
7922 then set the output to FOO. */
7924 && TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))) == '<'
7925 && integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 1))
7926 && operand_equal_p (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0),
7927 TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), 0)
7928 && (! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))
7929 || TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)) == SAVE_EXPR
)
7930 && safe_from_p (temp
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2), 1))
7932 if (GET_CODE (temp
) == REG
&& REGNO (temp
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
7933 temp
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
7934 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), temp
, 0);
7935 jumpif (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), op0
);
7937 start_cleanup_deferral ();
7938 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2), temp
, 0);
7942 && TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))) == '<'
7943 && integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 1))
7944 && operand_equal_p (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0),
7945 TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2), 0)
7946 && (! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))
7947 || TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2)) == SAVE_EXPR
)
7948 && safe_from_p (temp
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), 1))
7950 if (GET_CODE (temp
) == REG
&& REGNO (temp
) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
)
7951 temp
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
7952 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2), temp
, 0);
7953 jumpifnot (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), op0
);
7955 start_cleanup_deferral ();
7956 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), temp
, 0);
7961 op1
= gen_label_rtx ();
7962 jumpifnot (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), op0
);
7964 start_cleanup_deferral ();
7966 /* One branch of the cond can be void, if it never returns. For
7967 example A ? throw : E */
7969 && TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)) != void_type_node
)
7970 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), temp
, 0);
7972 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1),
7973 ignore
? const0_rtx
: NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
7974 end_cleanup_deferral ();
7976 emit_jump_insn (gen_jump (op1
));
7979 start_cleanup_deferral ();
7981 && TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2)) != void_type_node
)
7982 store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2), temp
, 0);
7984 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2),
7985 ignore
? const0_rtx
: NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
7988 end_cleanup_deferral ();
7999 /* Something needs to be initialized, but we didn't know
8000 where that thing was when building the tree. For example,
8001 it could be the return value of a function, or a parameter
8002 to a function which lays down in the stack, or a temporary
8003 variable which must be passed by reference.
8005 We guarantee that the expression will either be constructed
8006 or copied into our original target. */
8008 tree slot
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
8009 tree cleanups
= NULL_TREE
;
8012 if (TREE_CODE (slot
) != VAR_DECL
)
8016 target
= original_target
;
8018 /* Set this here so that if we get a target that refers to a
8019 register variable that's already been used, put_reg_into_stack
8020 knows that it should fix up those uses. */
8021 TREE_USED (slot
) = 1;
8025 if (DECL_RTL (slot
) != 0)
8027 target
= DECL_RTL (slot
);
8028 /* If we have already expanded the slot, so don't do
8030 if (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1) == NULL_TREE
)
8035 target
= assign_temp (type
, 2, 0, 1);
8036 /* All temp slots at this level must not conflict. */
8037 preserve_temp_slots (target
);
8038 DECL_RTL (slot
) = target
;
8039 if (TREE_ADDRESSABLE (slot
))
8041 TREE_ADDRESSABLE (slot
) = 0;
8042 mark_addressable (slot
);
8045 /* Since SLOT is not known to the called function
8046 to belong to its stack frame, we must build an explicit
8047 cleanup. This case occurs when we must build up a reference
8048 to pass the reference as an argument. In this case,
8049 it is very likely that such a reference need not be
8052 if (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2) == 0)
8053 TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2) = maybe_build_cleanup (slot
);
8054 cleanups
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2);
8059 /* This case does occur, when expanding a parameter which
8060 needs to be constructed on the stack. The target
8061 is the actual stack address that we want to initialize.
8062 The function we call will perform the cleanup in this case. */
8064 /* If we have already assigned it space, use that space,
8065 not target that we were passed in, as our target
8066 parameter is only a hint. */
8067 if (DECL_RTL (slot
) != 0)
8069 target
= DECL_RTL (slot
);
8070 /* If we have already expanded the slot, so don't do
8072 if (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1) == NULL_TREE
)
8077 DECL_RTL (slot
) = target
;
8078 /* If we must have an addressable slot, then make sure that
8079 the RTL that we just stored in slot is OK. */
8080 if (TREE_ADDRESSABLE (slot
))
8082 TREE_ADDRESSABLE (slot
) = 0;
8083 mark_addressable (slot
);
8088 exp1
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 3) = TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
8089 /* Mark it as expanded. */
8090 TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1) = NULL_TREE
;
8092 store_expr (exp1
, target
, 0);
8094 expand_decl_cleanup (NULL_TREE
, cleanups
);
8101 tree lhs
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
8102 tree rhs
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
8103 tree noncopied_parts
= 0;
8104 tree lhs_type
= TREE_TYPE (lhs
);
8106 temp
= expand_assignment (lhs
, rhs
, ! ignore
, original_target
!= 0);
8107 if (TYPE_NONCOPIED_PARTS (lhs_type
) != 0 && !fixed_type_p (rhs
))
8108 noncopied_parts
= init_noncopied_parts (stabilize_reference (lhs
),
8109 TYPE_NONCOPIED_PARTS (lhs_type
));
8110 while (noncopied_parts
!= 0)
8112 expand_assignment (TREE_VALUE (noncopied_parts
),
8113 TREE_PURPOSE (noncopied_parts
), 0, 0);
8114 noncopied_parts
= TREE_CHAIN (noncopied_parts
);
8121 /* If lhs is complex, expand calls in rhs before computing it.
8122 That's so we don't compute a pointer and save it over a call.
8123 If lhs is simple, compute it first so we can give it as a
8124 target if the rhs is just a call. This avoids an extra temp and copy
8125 and that prevents a partial-subsumption which makes bad code.
8126 Actually we could treat component_ref's of vars like vars. */
8128 tree lhs
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
8129 tree rhs
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
8130 tree noncopied_parts
= 0;
8131 tree lhs_type
= TREE_TYPE (lhs
);
8135 if (TREE_CODE (lhs
) != VAR_DECL
8136 && TREE_CODE (lhs
) != RESULT_DECL
8137 && TREE_CODE (lhs
) != PARM_DECL
8138 && ! (TREE_CODE (lhs
) == INDIRECT_REF
8139 && TYPE_READONLY (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (lhs
, 0)))))
8140 preexpand_calls (exp
);
8142 /* Check for |= or &= of a bitfield of size one into another bitfield
8143 of size 1. In this case, (unless we need the result of the
8144 assignment) we can do this more efficiently with a
8145 test followed by an assignment, if necessary.
8147 ??? At this point, we can't get a BIT_FIELD_REF here. But if
8148 things change so we do, this code should be enhanced to
8151 && TREE_CODE (lhs
) == COMPONENT_REF
8152 && (TREE_CODE (rhs
) == BIT_IOR_EXPR
8153 || TREE_CODE (rhs
) == BIT_AND_EXPR
)
8154 && TREE_OPERAND (rhs
, 0) == lhs
8155 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (rhs
, 1)) == COMPONENT_REF
8156 && TREE_INT_CST_LOW (DECL_SIZE (TREE_OPERAND (lhs
, 1))) == 1
8157 && TREE_INT_CST_LOW (DECL_SIZE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (rhs
, 1), 1))) == 1)
8159 rtx label
= gen_label_rtx ();
8161 do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (rhs
, 1),
8162 TREE_CODE (rhs
) == BIT_IOR_EXPR
? label
: 0,
8163 TREE_CODE (rhs
) == BIT_AND_EXPR
? label
: 0);
8164 expand_assignment (lhs
, convert (TREE_TYPE (rhs
),
8165 (TREE_CODE (rhs
) == BIT_IOR_EXPR
8167 : integer_zero_node
)),
8169 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
8174 if (TYPE_NONCOPIED_PARTS (lhs_type
) != 0
8175 && ! (fixed_type_p (lhs
) && fixed_type_p (rhs
)))
8176 noncopied_parts
= save_noncopied_parts (stabilize_reference (lhs
),
8177 TYPE_NONCOPIED_PARTS (lhs_type
));
8179 temp
= expand_assignment (lhs
, rhs
, ! ignore
, original_target
!= 0);
8180 while (noncopied_parts
!= 0)
8182 expand_assignment (TREE_PURPOSE (noncopied_parts
),
8183 TREE_VALUE (noncopied_parts
), 0, 0);
8184 noncopied_parts
= TREE_CHAIN (noncopied_parts
);
8190 if (!TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))
8191 expand_null_return ();
8193 expand_return (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0));
8196 case PREINCREMENT_EXPR
:
8197 case PREDECREMENT_EXPR
:
8198 return expand_increment (exp
, 0, ignore
);
8200 case POSTINCREMENT_EXPR
:
8201 case POSTDECREMENT_EXPR
:
8202 /* Faster to treat as pre-increment if result is not used. */
8203 return expand_increment (exp
, ! ignore
, ignore
);
8206 /* If nonzero, TEMP will be set to the address of something that might
8207 be a MEM corresponding to a stack slot. */
8210 /* Are we taking the address of a nested function? */
8211 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)) == FUNCTION_DECL
8212 && decl_function_context (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)) != 0
8213 && ! DECL_NO_STATIC_CHAIN (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))
8214 && ! TREE_STATIC (exp
))
8216 op0
= trampoline_address (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0));
8217 op0
= force_operand (op0
, target
);
8219 /* If we are taking the address of something erroneous, just
8221 else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)) == ERROR_MARK
)
8225 /* We make sure to pass const0_rtx down if we came in with
8226 ignore set, to avoid doing the cleanups twice for something. */
8227 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0),
8228 ignore
? const0_rtx
: NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
,
8229 (modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
8230 ? modifier
: EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
));
8232 /* If we are going to ignore the result, OP0 will have been set
8233 to const0_rtx, so just return it. Don't get confused and
8234 think we are taking the address of the constant. */
8238 op0
= protect_from_queue (op0
, 0);
8240 /* We would like the object in memory. If it is a constant, we can
8241 have it be statically allocated into memory. For a non-constant,
8242 we need to allocate some memory and store the value into it. */
8244 if (CONSTANT_P (op0
))
8245 op0
= force_const_mem (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))),
8247 else if (GET_CODE (op0
) == MEM
)
8249 mark_temp_addr_taken (op0
);
8250 temp
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
8253 else if (GET_CODE (op0
) == REG
|| GET_CODE (op0
) == SUBREG
8254 || GET_CODE (op0
) == CONCAT
|| GET_CODE (op0
) == ADDRESSOF
)
8256 /* If this object is in a register, it must be not
8258 tree inner_type
= TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0));
8259 rtx memloc
= assign_temp (inner_type
, 1, 1, 1);
8261 mark_temp_addr_taken (memloc
);
8262 emit_move_insn (memloc
, op0
);
8266 if (GET_CODE (op0
) != MEM
)
8269 if (modifier
== EXPAND_SUM
|| modifier
== EXPAND_INITIALIZER
)
8271 temp
= XEXP (op0
, 0);
8272 #ifdef POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
8273 if (GET_MODE (temp
) == Pmode
&& GET_MODE (temp
) != mode
8274 && mode
== ptr_mode
)
8275 temp
= convert_memory_address (ptr_mode
, temp
);
8280 op0
= force_operand (XEXP (op0
, 0), target
);
8283 if (flag_force_addr
&& GET_CODE (op0
) != REG
)
8284 op0
= force_reg (Pmode
, op0
);
8286 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == REG
8287 && ! REG_USERVAR_P (op0
))
8288 mark_reg_pointer (op0
, TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (type
)) / BITS_PER_UNIT
);
8290 /* If we might have had a temp slot, add an equivalent address
8293 update_temp_slot_address (temp
, op0
);
8295 #ifdef POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
8296 if (GET_MODE (op0
) == Pmode
&& GET_MODE (op0
) != mode
8297 && mode
== ptr_mode
)
8298 op0
= convert_memory_address (ptr_mode
, op0
);
8303 case ENTRY_VALUE_EXPR
:
8306 /* COMPLEX type for Extended Pascal & Fortran */
8309 enum machine_mode mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
8312 /* Get the rtx code of the operands. */
8313 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0, VOIDmode
, 0);
8314 op1
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), 0, VOIDmode
, 0);
8317 target
= gen_reg_rtx (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
8321 /* Move the real (op0) and imaginary (op1) parts to their location. */
8322 emit_move_insn (gen_realpart (mode
, target
), op0
);
8323 emit_move_insn (gen_imagpart (mode
, target
), op1
);
8325 insns
= get_insns ();
8328 /* Complex construction should appear as a single unit. */
8329 /* If TARGET is a CONCAT, we got insns like RD = RS, ID = IS,
8330 each with a separate pseudo as destination.
8331 It's not correct for flow to treat them as a unit. */
8332 if (GET_CODE (target
) != CONCAT
)
8333 emit_no_conflict_block (insns
, target
, op0
, op1
, NULL_RTX
);
8341 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0, VOIDmode
, 0);
8342 return gen_realpart (mode
, op0
);
8345 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0, VOIDmode
, 0);
8346 return gen_imagpart (mode
, op0
);
8350 enum machine_mode partmode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (exp
)));
8354 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0, VOIDmode
, 0);
8357 target
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
8361 /* Store the realpart and the negated imagpart to target. */
8362 emit_move_insn (gen_realpart (partmode
, target
),
8363 gen_realpart (partmode
, op0
));
8365 imag_t
= gen_imagpart (partmode
, target
);
8366 temp
= expand_unop (partmode
, neg_optab
,
8367 gen_imagpart (partmode
, op0
), imag_t
, 0);
8369 emit_move_insn (imag_t
, temp
);
8371 insns
= get_insns ();
8374 /* Conjugate should appear as a single unit
8375 If TARGET is a CONCAT, we got insns like RD = RS, ID = - IS,
8376 each with a separate pseudo as destination.
8377 It's not correct for flow to treat them as a unit. */
8378 if (GET_CODE (target
) != CONCAT
)
8379 emit_no_conflict_block (insns
, target
, op0
, NULL_RTX
, NULL_RTX
);
8386 case TRY_CATCH_EXPR
:
8388 tree handler
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
8390 expand_eh_region_start ();
8392 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0, VOIDmode
, 0);
8394 expand_eh_region_end (handler
);
8399 case TRY_FINALLY_EXPR
:
8401 tree try_block
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
8402 tree finally_block
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
8403 rtx finally_label
= gen_label_rtx ();
8404 rtx done_label
= gen_label_rtx ();
8405 rtx return_link
= gen_reg_rtx (Pmode
);
8406 tree cleanup
= build (GOTO_SUBROUTINE_EXPR
, void_type_node
,
8407 (tree
) finally_label
, (tree
) return_link
);
8408 TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (cleanup
) = 1;
8410 /* Start a new binding layer that will keep track of all cleanup
8411 actions to be performed. */
8412 expand_start_bindings (2);
8414 target_temp_slot_level
= temp_slot_level
;
8416 expand_decl_cleanup (NULL_TREE
, cleanup
);
8417 op0
= expand_expr (try_block
, target
, tmode
, modifier
);
8419 preserve_temp_slots (op0
);
8420 expand_end_bindings (NULL_TREE
, 0, 0);
8421 emit_jump (done_label
);
8422 emit_label (finally_label
);
8423 expand_expr (finally_block
, const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, 0);
8424 emit_indirect_jump (return_link
);
8425 emit_label (done_label
);
8429 case GOTO_SUBROUTINE_EXPR
:
8431 rtx subr
= (rtx
) TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
8432 rtx return_link
= *(rtx
*) &TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
8433 rtx return_address
= gen_label_rtx ();
8434 emit_move_insn (return_link
, gen_rtx_LABEL_REF (Pmode
, return_address
));
8436 emit_label (return_address
);
8442 rtx dcc
= get_dynamic_cleanup_chain ();
8443 emit_move_insn (dcc
, validize_mem (gen_rtx_MEM (Pmode
, dcc
)));
8449 rtx dhc
= get_dynamic_handler_chain ();
8450 emit_move_insn (dhc
, validize_mem (gen_rtx_MEM (Pmode
, dhc
)));
8455 return expand_builtin_va_arg (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), type
);
8458 return (*lang_expand_expr
) (exp
, original_target
, tmode
, modifier
);
8461 /* Here to do an ordinary binary operator, generating an instruction
8462 from the optab already placed in `this_optab'. */
8464 preexpand_calls (exp
);
8465 if (! safe_from_p (subtarget
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), 1))
8467 op0
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), subtarget
, VOIDmode
, 0);
8468 op1
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
8470 temp
= expand_binop (mode
, this_optab
, op0
, op1
, target
,
8471 unsignedp
, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
8477 /* Similar to expand_expr, except that we don't specify a target, target
8478 mode, or modifier and we return the alignment of the inner type. This is
8479 used in cases where it is not necessary to align the result to the
8480 alignment of its type as long as we know the alignment of the result, for
8481 example for comparisons of BLKmode values. */
8484 expand_expr_unaligned (exp
, palign
)
8486 unsigned int *palign
;
8489 tree type
= TREE_TYPE (exp
);
8490 register enum machine_mode mode
= TYPE_MODE (type
);
8492 /* Default the alignment we return to that of the type. */
8493 *palign
= TYPE_ALIGN (type
);
8495 /* The only cases in which we do anything special is if the resulting mode
8497 if (mode
!= BLKmode
)
8498 return expand_expr (exp
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8500 switch (TREE_CODE (exp
))
8504 case NON_LVALUE_EXPR
:
8505 /* Conversions between BLKmode values don't change the underlying
8506 alignment or value. */
8507 if (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))) == BLKmode
)
8508 return expand_expr_unaligned (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), palign
);
8512 /* Much of the code for this case is copied directly from expand_expr.
8513 We need to duplicate it here because we will do something different
8514 in the fall-through case, so we need to handle the same exceptions
8517 tree array
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
8518 tree domain
= TYPE_DOMAIN (TREE_TYPE (array
));
8519 tree low_bound
= domain
? TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain
) : integer_zero_node
;
8520 tree index
= convert (sizetype
, TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1));
8523 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))) != ARRAY_TYPE
)
8526 /* Optimize the special-case of a zero lower bound.
8528 We convert the low_bound to sizetype to avoid some problems
8529 with constant folding. (E.g. suppose the lower bound is 1,
8530 and its mode is QI. Without the conversion, (ARRAY
8531 +(INDEX-(unsigned char)1)) becomes ((ARRAY+(-(unsigned char)1))
8532 +INDEX), which becomes (ARRAY+255+INDEX). Oops!) */
8534 if (! integer_zerop (low_bound
))
8535 index
= size_diffop (index
, convert (sizetype
, low_bound
));
8537 /* If this is a constant index into a constant array,
8538 just get the value from the array. Handle both the cases when
8539 we have an explicit constructor and when our operand is a variable
8540 that was declared const. */
8542 if (TREE_CODE (array
) == CONSTRUCTOR
&& ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (array
))
8544 if (TREE_CODE (index
) == INTEGER_CST
8545 && TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (index
) == 0)
8547 tree elem
= CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0));
8549 i
= TREE_INT_CST_LOW (index
);
8551 elem
= TREE_CHAIN (elem
);
8553 return expand_expr_unaligned (fold (TREE_VALUE (elem
)),
8558 else if (optimize
>= 1
8559 && TREE_READONLY (array
) && ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (array
)
8560 && TREE_CODE (array
) == VAR_DECL
&& DECL_INITIAL (array
)
8561 && TREE_CODE (DECL_INITIAL (array
)) != ERROR_MARK
)
8563 if (TREE_CODE (index
) == INTEGER_CST
)
8565 tree init
= DECL_INITIAL (array
);
8567 i
= TREE_INT_CST_LOW (index
);
8568 if (TREE_CODE (init
) == CONSTRUCTOR
)
8570 tree elem
= CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (init
);
8573 && !tree_int_cst_equal (TREE_PURPOSE (elem
), index
))
8574 elem
= TREE_CHAIN (elem
);
8576 return expand_expr_unaligned (fold (TREE_VALUE (elem
)),
8583 /* ... fall through ... */
8587 /* If the operand is a CONSTRUCTOR, we can just extract the
8588 appropriate field if it is present. Don't do this if we have
8589 already written the data since we want to refer to that copy
8590 and varasm.c assumes that's what we'll do. */
8591 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) != ARRAY_REF
8592 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)) == CONSTRUCTOR
8593 && TREE_CST_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)) == 0)
8597 for (elt
= CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)); elt
;
8598 elt
= TREE_CHAIN (elt
))
8599 if (TREE_PURPOSE (elt
) == TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1))
8600 /* Note that unlike the case in expand_expr, we know this is
8601 BLKmode and hence not an integer. */
8602 return expand_expr_unaligned (TREE_VALUE (elt
), palign
);
8606 enum machine_mode mode1
;
8611 unsigned int alignment
;
8613 tree tem
= get_inner_reference (exp
, &bitsize
, &bitpos
, &offset
,
8614 &mode1
, &unsignedp
, &volatilep
,
8617 /* If we got back the original object, something is wrong. Perhaps
8618 we are evaluating an expression too early. In any event, don't
8619 infinitely recurse. */
8623 op0
= expand_expr (tem
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8625 /* If this is a constant, put it into a register if it is a
8626 legitimate constant and OFFSET is 0 and memory if it isn't. */
8627 if (CONSTANT_P (op0
))
8629 enum machine_mode inner_mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (tem
));
8631 if (inner_mode
!= BLKmode
&& LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (op0
)
8633 op0
= force_reg (inner_mode
, op0
);
8635 op0
= validize_mem (force_const_mem (inner_mode
, op0
));
8640 rtx offset_rtx
= expand_expr (offset
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
8642 /* If this object is in a register, put it into memory.
8643 This case can't occur in C, but can in Ada if we have
8644 unchecked conversion of an expression from a scalar type to
8645 an array or record type. */
8646 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == REG
|| GET_CODE (op0
) == SUBREG
8647 || GET_CODE (op0
) == CONCAT
|| GET_CODE (op0
) == ADDRESSOF
)
8649 rtx memloc
= assign_temp (TREE_TYPE (tem
), 1, 1, 1);
8651 mark_temp_addr_taken (memloc
);
8652 emit_move_insn (memloc
, op0
);
8656 if (GET_CODE (op0
) != MEM
)
8659 if (GET_MODE (offset_rtx
) != ptr_mode
)
8661 #ifdef POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
8662 offset_rtx
= convert_memory_address (ptr_mode
, offset_rtx
);
8664 offset_rtx
= convert_to_mode (ptr_mode
, offset_rtx
, 0);
8668 op0
= change_address (op0
, VOIDmode
,
8669 gen_rtx_PLUS (ptr_mode
, XEXP (op0
, 0),
8670 force_reg (ptr_mode
,
8674 /* Don't forget about volatility even if this is a bitfield. */
8675 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == MEM
&& volatilep
&& ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0
))
8677 op0
= copy_rtx (op0
);
8678 MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0
) = 1;
8681 /* Check the access. */
8682 if (current_function_check_memory_usage
&& GET_CODE (op0
) == MEM
)
8687 to
= plus_constant (XEXP (op0
, 0), (bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
));
8688 size
= (bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
) + bitsize
+ BITS_PER_UNIT
- 1;
8690 /* Check the access right of the pointer. */
8691 if (size
> BITS_PER_UNIT
)
8692 emit_library_call (chkr_check_addr_libfunc
, 1, VOIDmode
, 3,
8693 to
, ptr_mode
, GEN_INT (size
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
),
8694 TYPE_MODE (sizetype
),
8695 GEN_INT (MEMORY_USE_RO
),
8696 TYPE_MODE (integer_type_node
));
8699 /* In cases where an aligned union has an unaligned object
8700 as a field, we might be extracting a BLKmode value from
8701 an integer-mode (e.g., SImode) object. Handle this case
8702 by doing the extract into an object as wide as the field
8703 (which we know to be the width of a basic mode), then
8704 storing into memory, and changing the mode to BLKmode.
8705 If we ultimately want the address (EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS or
8706 EXPAND_INITIALIZER), then we must not copy to a temporary. */
8707 if (mode1
== VOIDmode
8708 || GET_CODE (op0
) == REG
|| GET_CODE (op0
) == SUBREG
8709 || (SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (mode1
, alignment
)
8710 && (TYPE_ALIGN (type
) > alignment
* BITS_PER_UNIT
8711 || bitpos
% TYPE_ALIGN (type
) != 0)))
8713 enum machine_mode ext_mode
= mode_for_size (bitsize
, MODE_INT
, 1);
8715 if (ext_mode
== BLKmode
)
8717 /* In this case, BITPOS must start at a byte boundary. */
8718 if (GET_CODE (op0
) != MEM
8719 || bitpos
% BITS_PER_UNIT
!= 0)
8722 op0
= change_address (op0
, VOIDmode
,
8723 plus_constant (XEXP (op0
, 0),
8724 bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
));
8728 rtx
new = assign_stack_temp (ext_mode
,
8729 bitsize
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
, 0);
8731 op0
= extract_bit_field (validize_mem (op0
), bitsize
, bitpos
,
8732 unsignedp
, NULL_RTX
, ext_mode
,
8733 ext_mode
, alignment
,
8734 int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (tem
)));
8736 /* If the result is a record type and BITSIZE is narrower than
8737 the mode of OP0, an integral mode, and this is a big endian
8738 machine, we must put the field into the high-order bits. */
8739 if (TREE_CODE (type
) == RECORD_TYPE
&& BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
8740 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0
)) == MODE_INT
8741 && bitsize
< GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0
)))
8742 op0
= expand_shift (LSHIFT_EXPR
, GET_MODE (op0
), op0
,
8743 size_int (GET_MODE_BITSIZE
8749 emit_move_insn (new, op0
);
8750 op0
= copy_rtx (new);
8751 PUT_MODE (op0
, BLKmode
);
8755 /* Get a reference to just this component. */
8756 op0
= change_address (op0
, mode1
,
8757 plus_constant (XEXP (op0
, 0),
8758 (bitpos
/ BITS_PER_UNIT
)));
8760 MEM_ALIAS_SET (op0
) = get_alias_set (exp
);
8762 /* Adjust the alignment in case the bit position is not
8763 a multiple of the alignment of the inner object. */
8764 while (bitpos
% alignment
!= 0)
8767 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (op0
, 0)) == REG
)
8768 mark_reg_pointer (XEXP (op0
, 0), alignment
);
8770 MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (op0
) = 1;
8771 MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0
) |= volatilep
;
8773 *palign
= alignment
;
8782 return expand_expr (exp
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_NORMAL
);
8785 /* Return the tree node if a ARG corresponds to a string constant or zero
8786 if it doesn't. If we return non-zero, set *PTR_OFFSET to the offset
8787 in bytes within the string that ARG is accessing. The type of the
8788 offset will be `sizetype'. */
8791 string_constant (arg
, ptr_offset
)
8797 if (TREE_CODE (arg
) == ADDR_EXPR
8798 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0)) == STRING_CST
)
8800 *ptr_offset
= size_zero_node
;
8801 return TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0);
8803 else if (TREE_CODE (arg
) == PLUS_EXPR
)
8805 tree arg0
= TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 0);
8806 tree arg1
= TREE_OPERAND (arg
, 1);
8811 if (TREE_CODE (arg0
) == ADDR_EXPR
8812 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg0
, 0)) == STRING_CST
)
8814 *ptr_offset
= convert (sizetype
, arg1
);
8815 return TREE_OPERAND (arg0
, 0);
8817 else if (TREE_CODE (arg1
) == ADDR_EXPR
8818 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg1
, 0)) == STRING_CST
)
8820 *ptr_offset
= convert (sizetype
, arg0
);
8821 return TREE_OPERAND (arg1
, 0);
8828 /* Expand code for a post- or pre- increment or decrement
8829 and return the RTX for the result.
8830 POST is 1 for postinc/decrements and 0 for preinc/decrements. */
8833 expand_increment (exp
, post
, ignore
)
8837 register rtx op0
, op1
;
8838 register rtx temp
, value
;
8839 register tree incremented
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
8840 optab this_optab
= add_optab
;
8842 enum machine_mode mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp
));
8843 int op0_is_copy
= 0;
8844 int single_insn
= 0;
8845 /* 1 means we can't store into OP0 directly,
8846 because it is a subreg narrower than a word,
8847 and we don't dare clobber the rest of the word. */
8850 /* Stabilize any component ref that might need to be
8851 evaluated more than once below. */
8853 || TREE_CODE (incremented
) == BIT_FIELD_REF
8854 || (TREE_CODE (incremented
) == COMPONENT_REF
8855 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (incremented
, 0)) != INDIRECT_REF
8856 || DECL_BIT_FIELD (TREE_OPERAND (incremented
, 1)))))
8857 incremented
= stabilize_reference (incremented
);
8858 /* Nested *INCREMENT_EXPRs can happen in C++. We must force innermost
8859 ones into save exprs so that they don't accidentally get evaluated
8860 more than once by the code below. */
8861 if (TREE_CODE (incremented
) == PREINCREMENT_EXPR
8862 || TREE_CODE (incremented
) == PREDECREMENT_EXPR
)
8863 incremented
= save_expr (incremented
);
8865 /* Compute the operands as RTX.
8866 Note whether OP0 is the actual lvalue or a copy of it:
8867 I believe it is a copy iff it is a register or subreg
8868 and insns were generated in computing it. */
8870 temp
= get_last_insn ();
8871 op0
= expand_expr (incremented
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, EXPAND_MEMORY_USE_RW
);
8873 /* If OP0 is a SUBREG made for a promoted variable, we cannot increment
8874 in place but instead must do sign- or zero-extension during assignment,
8875 so we copy it into a new register and let the code below use it as
8878 Note that we can safely modify this SUBREG since it is know not to be
8879 shared (it was made by the expand_expr call above). */
8881 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == SUBREG
&& SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (op0
))
8884 SUBREG_REG (op0
) = copy_to_reg (SUBREG_REG (op0
));
8888 else if (GET_CODE (op0
) == SUBREG
8889 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0
)) < BITS_PER_WORD
)
8891 /* We cannot increment this SUBREG in place. If we are
8892 post-incrementing, get a copy of the old value. Otherwise,
8893 just mark that we cannot increment in place. */
8895 op0
= copy_to_reg (op0
);
8900 op0_is_copy
= ((GET_CODE (op0
) == SUBREG
|| GET_CODE (op0
) == REG
)
8901 && temp
!= get_last_insn ());
8902 op1
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
,
8903 EXPAND_MEMORY_USE_BAD
);
8905 /* Decide whether incrementing or decrementing. */
8906 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == POSTDECREMENT_EXPR
8907 || TREE_CODE (exp
) == PREDECREMENT_EXPR
)
8908 this_optab
= sub_optab
;
8910 /* Convert decrement by a constant into a negative increment. */
8911 if (this_optab
== sub_optab
8912 && GET_CODE (op1
) == CONST_INT
)
8914 op1
= GEN_INT (- INTVAL (op1
));
8915 this_optab
= add_optab
;
8918 /* For a preincrement, see if we can do this with a single instruction. */
8921 icode
= (int) this_optab
->handlers
[(int) mode
].insn_code
;
8922 if (icode
!= (int) CODE_FOR_nothing
8923 /* Make sure that OP0 is valid for operands 0 and 1
8924 of the insn we want to queue. */
8925 && (*insn_data
[icode
].operand
[0].predicate
) (op0
, mode
)
8926 && (*insn_data
[icode
].operand
[1].predicate
) (op0
, mode
)
8927 && (*insn_data
[icode
].operand
[2].predicate
) (op1
, mode
))
8931 /* If OP0 is not the actual lvalue, but rather a copy in a register,
8932 then we cannot just increment OP0. We must therefore contrive to
8933 increment the original value. Then, for postincrement, we can return
8934 OP0 since it is a copy of the old value. For preincrement, expand here
8935 unless we can do it with a single insn.
8937 Likewise if storing directly into OP0 would clobber high bits
8938 we need to preserve (bad_subreg). */
8939 if (op0_is_copy
|| (!post
&& !single_insn
) || bad_subreg
)
8941 /* This is the easiest way to increment the value wherever it is.
8942 Problems with multiple evaluation of INCREMENTED are prevented
8943 because either (1) it is a component_ref or preincrement,
8944 in which case it was stabilized above, or (2) it is an array_ref
8945 with constant index in an array in a register, which is
8946 safe to reevaluate. */
8947 tree newexp
= build (((TREE_CODE (exp
) == POSTDECREMENT_EXPR
8948 || TREE_CODE (exp
) == PREDECREMENT_EXPR
)
8949 ? MINUS_EXPR
: PLUS_EXPR
),
8952 TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1));
8954 while (TREE_CODE (incremented
) == NOP_EXPR
8955 || TREE_CODE (incremented
) == CONVERT_EXPR
)
8957 newexp
= convert (TREE_TYPE (incremented
), newexp
);
8958 incremented
= TREE_OPERAND (incremented
, 0);
8961 temp
= expand_assignment (incremented
, newexp
, ! post
&& ! ignore
, 0);
8962 return post
? op0
: temp
;
8967 /* We have a true reference to the value in OP0.
8968 If there is an insn to add or subtract in this mode, queue it.
8969 Queueing the increment insn avoids the register shuffling
8970 that often results if we must increment now and first save
8971 the old value for subsequent use. */
8973 #if 0 /* Turned off to avoid making extra insn for indexed memref. */
8974 op0
= stabilize (op0
);
8977 icode
= (int) this_optab
->handlers
[(int) mode
].insn_code
;
8978 if (icode
!= (int) CODE_FOR_nothing
8979 /* Make sure that OP0 is valid for operands 0 and 1
8980 of the insn we want to queue. */
8981 && (*insn_data
[icode
].operand
[0].predicate
) (op0
, mode
)
8982 && (*insn_data
[icode
].operand
[1].predicate
) (op0
, mode
))
8984 if (! (*insn_data
[icode
].operand
[2].predicate
) (op1
, mode
))
8985 op1
= force_reg (mode
, op1
);
8987 return enqueue_insn (op0
, GEN_FCN (icode
) (op0
, op0
, op1
));
8989 if (icode
!= (int) CODE_FOR_nothing
&& GET_CODE (op0
) == MEM
)
8991 rtx addr
= (general_operand (XEXP (op0
, 0), mode
)
8992 ? force_reg (Pmode
, XEXP (op0
, 0))
8993 : copy_to_reg (XEXP (op0
, 0)));
8996 op0
= change_address (op0
, VOIDmode
, addr
);
8997 temp
= force_reg (GET_MODE (op0
), op0
);
8998 if (! (*insn_data
[icode
].operand
[2].predicate
) (op1
, mode
))
8999 op1
= force_reg (mode
, op1
);
9001 /* The increment queue is LIFO, thus we have to `queue'
9002 the instructions in reverse order. */
9003 enqueue_insn (op0
, gen_move_insn (op0
, temp
));
9004 result
= enqueue_insn (temp
, GEN_FCN (icode
) (temp
, temp
, op1
));
9009 /* Preincrement, or we can't increment with one simple insn. */
9011 /* Save a copy of the value before inc or dec, to return it later. */
9012 temp
= value
= copy_to_reg (op0
);
9014 /* Arrange to return the incremented value. */
9015 /* Copy the rtx because expand_binop will protect from the queue,
9016 and the results of that would be invalid for us to return
9017 if our caller does emit_queue before using our result. */
9018 temp
= copy_rtx (value
= op0
);
9020 /* Increment however we can. */
9021 op1
= expand_binop (mode
, this_optab
, value
, op1
,
9022 current_function_check_memory_usage
? NULL_RTX
: op0
,
9023 TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp
)), OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
9024 /* Make sure the value is stored into OP0. */
9026 emit_move_insn (op0
, op1
);
9031 /* Expand all function calls contained within EXP, innermost ones first.
9032 But don't look within expressions that have sequence points.
9033 For each CALL_EXPR, record the rtx for its value
9034 in the CALL_EXPR_RTL field. */
9037 preexpand_calls (exp
)
9040 register int nops
, i
;
9041 int type
= TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (exp
));
9043 if (! do_preexpand_calls
)
9046 /* Only expressions and references can contain calls. */
9048 if (type
!= 'e' && type
!= '<' && type
!= '1' && type
!= '2' && type
!= 'r')
9051 switch (TREE_CODE (exp
))
9054 /* Do nothing if already expanded. */
9055 if (CALL_EXPR_RTL (exp
) != 0
9056 /* Do nothing if the call returns a variable-sized object. */
9057 || TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE(exp
))) != INTEGER_CST
9058 /* Do nothing to built-in functions. */
9059 || (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)) == ADDR_EXPR
9060 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0))
9062 && DECL_BUILT_IN (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), 0))))
9065 CALL_EXPR_RTL (exp
) = expand_call (exp
, NULL_RTX
, 0);
9070 case TRUTH_ANDIF_EXPR
:
9071 case TRUTH_ORIF_EXPR
:
9072 /* If we find one of these, then we can be sure
9073 the adjust will be done for it (since it makes jumps).
9074 Do it now, so that if this is inside an argument
9075 of a function, we don't get the stack adjustment
9076 after some other args have already been pushed. */
9077 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
9082 case WITH_CLEANUP_EXPR
:
9083 case CLEANUP_POINT_EXPR
:
9084 case TRY_CATCH_EXPR
:
9088 if (SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp
) != 0)
9095 nops
= tree_code_length
[(int) TREE_CODE (exp
)];
9096 for (i
= 0; i
< nops
; i
++)
9097 if (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, i
) != 0)
9099 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == TARGET_EXPR
&& i
== 2)
9100 /* We don't need to preexpand the cleanup for a TARGET_EXPR.
9101 It doesn't happen before the call is made. */
9105 type
= TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, i
)));
9106 if (type
== 'e' || type
== '<' || type
== '1' || type
== '2'
9108 preexpand_calls (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, i
));
9113 /* At the start of a function, record that we have no previously-pushed
9114 arguments waiting to be popped. */
9117 init_pending_stack_adjust ()
9119 pending_stack_adjust
= 0;
9122 /* When exiting from function, if safe, clear out any pending stack adjust
9123 so the adjustment won't get done.
9125 Note, if the current function calls alloca, then it must have a
9126 frame pointer regardless of the value of flag_omit_frame_pointer. */
9129 clear_pending_stack_adjust ()
9131 #ifdef EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
9133 && (! flag_omit_frame_pointer
|| current_function_calls_alloca
)
9134 && EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
9135 && ! (DECL_INLINE (current_function_decl
) && ! flag_no_inline
)
9136 && ! flag_inline_functions
)
9137 pending_stack_adjust
= 0;
9141 /* Pop any previously-pushed arguments that have not been popped yet. */
9144 do_pending_stack_adjust ()
9146 if (inhibit_defer_pop
== 0)
9148 if (pending_stack_adjust
!= 0)
9149 adjust_stack (GEN_INT (pending_stack_adjust
));
9150 pending_stack_adjust
= 0;
9154 /* Expand conditional expressions. */
9156 /* Generate code to evaluate EXP and jump to LABEL if the value is zero.
9157 LABEL is an rtx of code CODE_LABEL, in this function and all the
9161 jumpifnot (exp
, label
)
9165 do_jump (exp
, label
, NULL_RTX
);
9168 /* Generate code to evaluate EXP and jump to LABEL if the value is nonzero. */
9175 do_jump (exp
, NULL_RTX
, label
);
9178 /* Generate code to evaluate EXP and jump to IF_FALSE_LABEL if
9179 the result is zero, or IF_TRUE_LABEL if the result is one.
9180 Either of IF_FALSE_LABEL and IF_TRUE_LABEL may be zero,
9181 meaning fall through in that case.
9183 do_jump always does any pending stack adjust except when it does not
9184 actually perform a jump. An example where there is no jump
9185 is when EXP is `(foo (), 0)' and IF_FALSE_LABEL is null.
9187 This function is responsible for optimizing cases such as
9188 &&, || and comparison operators in EXP. */
9191 do_jump (exp
, if_false_label
, if_true_label
)
9193 rtx if_false_label
, if_true_label
;
9195 register enum tree_code code
= TREE_CODE (exp
);
9196 /* Some cases need to create a label to jump to
9197 in order to properly fall through.
9198 These cases set DROP_THROUGH_LABEL nonzero. */
9199 rtx drop_through_label
= 0;
9203 enum machine_mode mode
;
9205 #ifdef MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE
9206 check_max_integer_computation_mode (exp
);
9217 temp
= integer_zerop (exp
) ? if_false_label
: if_true_label
;
9223 /* This is not true with #pragma weak */
9225 /* The address of something can never be zero. */
9227 emit_jump (if_true_label
);
9232 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)) == COMPONENT_REF
9233 || TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)) == BIT_FIELD_REF
9234 || TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)) == ARRAY_REF
)
9237 /* If we are narrowing the operand, we have to do the compare in the
9239 if ((TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (exp
))
9240 < TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)))))
9242 case NON_LVALUE_EXPR
:
9243 case REFERENCE_EXPR
:
9248 /* These cannot change zero->non-zero or vice versa. */
9249 do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), if_false_label
, if_true_label
);
9252 case WITH_RECORD_EXPR
:
9253 /* Put the object on the placeholder list, recurse through our first
9254 operand, and pop the list. */
9255 placeholder_list
= tree_cons (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), NULL_TREE
,
9257 do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), if_false_label
, if_true_label
);
9258 placeholder_list
= TREE_CHAIN (placeholder_list
);
9262 /* This is never less insns than evaluating the PLUS_EXPR followed by
9263 a test and can be longer if the test is eliminated. */
9265 /* Reduce to minus. */
9266 exp
= build (MINUS_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (exp
),
9267 TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0),
9268 fold (build1 (NEGATE_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)),
9269 TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1))));
9270 /* Process as MINUS. */
9274 /* Non-zero iff operands of minus differ. */
9275 do_compare_and_jump (build (NE_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (exp
),
9276 TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0),
9277 TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)),
9278 NE
, NE
, if_false_label
, if_true_label
);
9282 /* If we are AND'ing with a small constant, do this comparison in the
9283 smallest type that fits. If the machine doesn't have comparisons
9284 that small, it will be converted back to the wider comparison.
9285 This helps if we are testing the sign bit of a narrower object.
9286 combine can't do this for us because it can't know whether a
9287 ZERO_EXTRACT or a compare in a smaller mode exists, but we do. */
9289 if (! SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
9290 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
9291 && TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (exp
)) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
9292 && (i
= floor_log2 (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)))) >= 0
9293 && (mode
= mode_for_size (i
+ 1, MODE_INT
, 0)) != BLKmode
9294 && (type
= type_for_mode (mode
, 1)) != 0
9295 && TYPE_PRECISION (type
) < TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (exp
))
9296 && (cmp_optab
->handlers
[(int) TYPE_MODE (type
)].insn_code
9297 != CODE_FOR_nothing
))
9299 do_jump (convert (type
, exp
), if_false_label
, if_true_label
);
9304 case TRUTH_NOT_EXPR
:
9305 do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), if_true_label
, if_false_label
);
9308 case TRUTH_ANDIF_EXPR
:
9309 if (if_false_label
== 0)
9310 if_false_label
= drop_through_label
= gen_label_rtx ();
9311 do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), if_false_label
, NULL_RTX
);
9312 start_cleanup_deferral ();
9313 do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), if_false_label
, if_true_label
);
9314 end_cleanup_deferral ();
9317 case TRUTH_ORIF_EXPR
:
9318 if (if_true_label
== 0)
9319 if_true_label
= drop_through_label
= gen_label_rtx ();
9320 do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), NULL_RTX
, if_true_label
);
9321 start_cleanup_deferral ();
9322 do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), if_false_label
, if_true_label
);
9323 end_cleanup_deferral ();
9328 expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), const0_rtx
, VOIDmode
, 0);
9329 preserve_temp_slots (NULL_RTX
);
9333 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
9334 do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), if_false_label
, if_true_label
);
9341 int bitsize
, bitpos
, unsignedp
;
9342 enum machine_mode mode
;
9346 unsigned int alignment
;
9348 /* Get description of this reference. We don't actually care
9349 about the underlying object here. */
9350 get_inner_reference (exp
, &bitsize
, &bitpos
, &offset
,
9351 &mode
, &unsignedp
, &volatilep
,
9354 type
= type_for_size (bitsize
, unsignedp
);
9355 if (! SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
9356 && type
!= 0 && bitsize
>= 0
9357 && TYPE_PRECISION (type
) < TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (exp
))
9358 && (cmp_optab
->handlers
[(int) TYPE_MODE (type
)].insn_code
9359 != CODE_FOR_nothing
))
9361 do_jump (convert (type
, exp
), if_false_label
, if_true_label
);
9368 /* Do (a ? 1 : 0) and (a ? 0 : 1) as special cases. */
9369 if (integer_onep (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1))
9370 && integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2)))
9371 do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), if_false_label
, if_true_label
);
9373 else if (integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1))
9374 && integer_onep (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2)))
9375 do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), if_true_label
, if_false_label
);
9379 register rtx label1
= gen_label_rtx ();
9380 drop_through_label
= gen_label_rtx ();
9382 do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), label1
, NULL_RTX
);
9384 start_cleanup_deferral ();
9385 /* Now the THEN-expression. */
9386 do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1),
9387 if_false_label
? if_false_label
: drop_through_label
,
9388 if_true_label
? if_true_label
: drop_through_label
);
9389 /* In case the do_jump just above never jumps. */
9390 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
9391 emit_label (label1
);
9393 /* Now the ELSE-expression. */
9394 do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 2),
9395 if_false_label
? if_false_label
: drop_through_label
,
9396 if_true_label
? if_true_label
: drop_through_label
);
9397 end_cleanup_deferral ();
9403 tree inner_type
= TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0));
9405 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (TYPE_MODE (inner_type
)) == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT
9406 || GET_MODE_CLASS (TYPE_MODE (inner_type
)) == MODE_COMPLEX_INT
)
9408 tree exp0
= save_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0));
9409 tree exp1
= save_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1));
9412 (build (TRUTH_ANDIF_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (exp
),
9413 fold (build (EQ_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (exp
),
9414 fold (build1 (REALPART_EXPR
,
9415 TREE_TYPE (inner_type
),
9417 fold (build1 (REALPART_EXPR
,
9418 TREE_TYPE (inner_type
),
9420 fold (build (EQ_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (exp
),
9421 fold (build1 (IMAGPART_EXPR
,
9422 TREE_TYPE (inner_type
),
9424 fold (build1 (IMAGPART_EXPR
,
9425 TREE_TYPE (inner_type
),
9427 if_false_label
, if_true_label
);
9430 else if (integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)))
9431 do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), if_true_label
, if_false_label
);
9433 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (TYPE_MODE (inner_type
)) == MODE_INT
9434 && !can_compare_p (EQ
, TYPE_MODE (inner_type
), ccp_jump
))
9435 do_jump_by_parts_equality (exp
, if_false_label
, if_true_label
);
9437 do_compare_and_jump (exp
, EQ
, EQ
, if_false_label
, if_true_label
);
9443 tree inner_type
= TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0));
9445 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (TYPE_MODE (inner_type
)) == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT
9446 || GET_MODE_CLASS (TYPE_MODE (inner_type
)) == MODE_COMPLEX_INT
)
9448 tree exp0
= save_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0));
9449 tree exp1
= save_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1));
9452 (build (TRUTH_ORIF_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (exp
),
9453 fold (build (NE_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (exp
),
9454 fold (build1 (REALPART_EXPR
,
9455 TREE_TYPE (inner_type
),
9457 fold (build1 (REALPART_EXPR
,
9458 TREE_TYPE (inner_type
),
9460 fold (build (NE_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (exp
),
9461 fold (build1 (IMAGPART_EXPR
,
9462 TREE_TYPE (inner_type
),
9464 fold (build1 (IMAGPART_EXPR
,
9465 TREE_TYPE (inner_type
),
9467 if_false_label
, if_true_label
);
9470 else if (integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1)))
9471 do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), if_false_label
, if_true_label
);
9473 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (TYPE_MODE (inner_type
)) == MODE_INT
9474 && !can_compare_p (NE
, TYPE_MODE (inner_type
), ccp_jump
))
9475 do_jump_by_parts_equality (exp
, if_true_label
, if_false_label
);
9477 do_compare_and_jump (exp
, NE
, NE
, if_false_label
, if_true_label
);
9482 mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)));
9483 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
9484 && ! can_compare_p (LT
, mode
, ccp_jump
))
9485 do_jump_by_parts_greater (exp
, 1, if_false_label
, if_true_label
);
9487 do_compare_and_jump (exp
, LT
, LTU
, if_false_label
, if_true_label
);
9491 mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)));
9492 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
9493 && ! can_compare_p (LE
, mode
, ccp_jump
))
9494 do_jump_by_parts_greater (exp
, 0, if_true_label
, if_false_label
);
9496 do_compare_and_jump (exp
, LE
, LEU
, if_false_label
, if_true_label
);
9500 mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)));
9501 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
9502 && ! can_compare_p (GT
, mode
, ccp_jump
))
9503 do_jump_by_parts_greater (exp
, 0, if_false_label
, if_true_label
);
9505 do_compare_and_jump (exp
, GT
, GTU
, if_false_label
, if_true_label
);
9509 mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)));
9510 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode
) == MODE_INT
9511 && ! can_compare_p (GE
, mode
, ccp_jump
))
9512 do_jump_by_parts_greater (exp
, 1, if_true_label
, if_false_label
);
9514 do_compare_and_jump (exp
, GE
, GEU
, if_false_label
, if_true_label
);
9517 case UNORDERED_EXPR
:
9520 enum rtx_code cmp
, rcmp
;
9523 if (code
== UNORDERED_EXPR
)
9524 cmp
= UNORDERED
, rcmp
= ORDERED
;
9526 cmp
= ORDERED
, rcmp
= UNORDERED
;
9527 mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)));
9530 if (! can_compare_p (cmp
, mode
, ccp_jump
)
9531 && (can_compare_p (rcmp
, mode
, ccp_jump
)
9532 /* If the target doesn't provide either UNORDERED or ORDERED
9533 comparisons, canonicalize on UNORDERED for the library. */
9534 || rcmp
== UNORDERED
))
9538 do_compare_and_jump (exp
, cmp
, cmp
, if_false_label
, if_true_label
);
9540 do_compare_and_jump (exp
, rcmp
, rcmp
, if_true_label
, if_false_label
);
9545 enum rtx_code rcode1
;
9546 enum tree_code tcode2
;
9570 mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)));
9571 if (can_compare_p (rcode1
, mode
, ccp_jump
))
9572 do_compare_and_jump (exp
, rcode1
, rcode1
, if_false_label
,
9576 tree op0
= save_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0));
9577 tree op1
= save_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1));
9580 /* If the target doesn't support combined unordered
9581 compares, decompose into UNORDERED + comparison. */
9582 cmp0
= fold (build (UNORDERED_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (exp
), op0
, op1
));
9583 cmp1
= fold (build (tcode2
, TREE_TYPE (exp
), op0
, op1
));
9584 exp
= build (TRUTH_ORIF_EXPR
, TREE_TYPE (exp
), cmp0
, cmp1
);
9585 do_jump (exp
, if_false_label
, if_true_label
);
9592 temp
= expand_expr (exp
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
9594 /* This is not needed any more and causes poor code since it causes
9595 comparisons and tests from non-SI objects to have different code
9597 /* Copy to register to avoid generating bad insns by cse
9598 from (set (mem ...) (arithop)) (set (cc0) (mem ...)). */
9599 if (!cse_not_expected
&& GET_CODE (temp
) == MEM
)
9600 temp
= copy_to_reg (temp
);
9602 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
9603 /* Do any postincrements in the expression that was tested. */
9606 if (GET_CODE (temp
) == CONST_INT
|| GET_CODE (temp
) == LABEL_REF
)
9608 rtx target
= temp
== const0_rtx
? if_false_label
: if_true_label
;
9612 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (temp
)) == MODE_INT
9613 && ! can_compare_p (NE
, GET_MODE (temp
), ccp_jump
))
9614 /* Note swapping the labels gives us not-equal. */
9615 do_jump_by_parts_equality_rtx (temp
, if_true_label
, if_false_label
);
9616 else if (GET_MODE (temp
) != VOIDmode
)
9617 do_compare_rtx_and_jump (temp
, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (temp
)),
9618 NE
, TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp
)),
9619 GET_MODE (temp
), NULL_RTX
, 0,
9620 if_false_label
, if_true_label
);
9625 if (drop_through_label
)
9627 /* If do_jump produces code that might be jumped around,
9628 do any stack adjusts from that code, before the place
9629 where control merges in. */
9630 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
9631 emit_label (drop_through_label
);
9635 /* Given a comparison expression EXP for values too wide to be compared
9636 with one insn, test the comparison and jump to the appropriate label.
9637 The code of EXP is ignored; we always test GT if SWAP is 0,
9638 and LT if SWAP is 1. */
9641 do_jump_by_parts_greater (exp
, swap
, if_false_label
, if_true_label
)
9644 rtx if_false_label
, if_true_label
;
9646 rtx op0
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, swap
), NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
9647 rtx op1
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, !swap
), NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
9648 enum machine_mode mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)));
9649 int unsignedp
= TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)));
9651 do_jump_by_parts_greater_rtx (mode
, unsignedp
, op0
, op1
, if_false_label
, if_true_label
);
9654 /* Compare OP0 with OP1, word at a time, in mode MODE.
9655 UNSIGNEDP says to do unsigned comparison.
9656 Jump to IF_TRUE_LABEL if OP0 is greater, IF_FALSE_LABEL otherwise. */
9659 do_jump_by_parts_greater_rtx (mode
, unsignedp
, op0
, op1
, if_false_label
, if_true_label
)
9660 enum machine_mode mode
;
9663 rtx if_false_label
, if_true_label
;
9665 int nwords
= (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) / UNITS_PER_WORD
);
9666 rtx drop_through_label
= 0;
9669 if (! if_true_label
|| ! if_false_label
)
9670 drop_through_label
= gen_label_rtx ();
9671 if (! if_true_label
)
9672 if_true_label
= drop_through_label
;
9673 if (! if_false_label
)
9674 if_false_label
= drop_through_label
;
9676 /* Compare a word at a time, high order first. */
9677 for (i
= 0; i
< nwords
; i
++)
9679 rtx op0_word
, op1_word
;
9681 if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
)
9683 op0_word
= operand_subword_force (op0
, i
, mode
);
9684 op1_word
= operand_subword_force (op1
, i
, mode
);
9688 op0_word
= operand_subword_force (op0
, nwords
- 1 - i
, mode
);
9689 op1_word
= operand_subword_force (op1
, nwords
- 1 - i
, mode
);
9692 /* All but high-order word must be compared as unsigned. */
9693 do_compare_rtx_and_jump (op0_word
, op1_word
, GT
,
9694 (unsignedp
|| i
> 0), word_mode
, NULL_RTX
, 0,
9695 NULL_RTX
, if_true_label
);
9697 /* Consider lower words only if these are equal. */
9698 do_compare_rtx_and_jump (op0_word
, op1_word
, NE
, unsignedp
, word_mode
,
9699 NULL_RTX
, 0, NULL_RTX
, if_false_label
);
9703 emit_jump (if_false_label
);
9704 if (drop_through_label
)
9705 emit_label (drop_through_label
);
9708 /* Given an EQ_EXPR expression EXP for values too wide to be compared
9709 with one insn, test the comparison and jump to the appropriate label. */
9712 do_jump_by_parts_equality (exp
, if_false_label
, if_true_label
)
9714 rtx if_false_label
, if_true_label
;
9716 rtx op0
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
9717 rtx op1
= expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
9718 enum machine_mode mode
= TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)));
9719 int nwords
= (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode
) / UNITS_PER_WORD
);
9721 rtx drop_through_label
= 0;
9723 if (! if_false_label
)
9724 drop_through_label
= if_false_label
= gen_label_rtx ();
9726 for (i
= 0; i
< nwords
; i
++)
9727 do_compare_rtx_and_jump (operand_subword_force (op0
, i
, mode
),
9728 operand_subword_force (op1
, i
, mode
),
9729 EQ
, TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp
)),
9730 word_mode
, NULL_RTX
, 0, if_false_label
,
9734 emit_jump (if_true_label
);
9735 if (drop_through_label
)
9736 emit_label (drop_through_label
);
9739 /* Jump according to whether OP0 is 0.
9740 We assume that OP0 has an integer mode that is too wide
9741 for the available compare insns. */
9744 do_jump_by_parts_equality_rtx (op0
, if_false_label
, if_true_label
)
9746 rtx if_false_label
, if_true_label
;
9748 int nwords
= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (op0
)) / UNITS_PER_WORD
;
9751 rtx drop_through_label
= 0;
9753 /* The fastest way of doing this comparison on almost any machine is to
9754 "or" all the words and compare the result. If all have to be loaded
9755 from memory and this is a very wide item, it's possible this may
9756 be slower, but that's highly unlikely. */
9758 part
= gen_reg_rtx (word_mode
);
9759 emit_move_insn (part
, operand_subword_force (op0
, 0, GET_MODE (op0
)));
9760 for (i
= 1; i
< nwords
&& part
!= 0; i
++)
9761 part
= expand_binop (word_mode
, ior_optab
, part
,
9762 operand_subword_force (op0
, i
, GET_MODE (op0
)),
9763 part
, 1, OPTAB_WIDEN
);
9767 do_compare_rtx_and_jump (part
, const0_rtx
, EQ
, 1, word_mode
,
9768 NULL_RTX
, 0, if_false_label
, if_true_label
);
9773 /* If we couldn't do the "or" simply, do this with a series of compares. */
9774 if (! if_false_label
)
9775 drop_through_label
= if_false_label
= gen_label_rtx ();
9777 for (i
= 0; i
< nwords
; i
++)
9778 do_compare_rtx_and_jump (operand_subword_force (op0
, i
, GET_MODE (op0
)),
9779 const0_rtx
, EQ
, 1, word_mode
, NULL_RTX
, 0,
9780 if_false_label
, NULL_RTX
);
9783 emit_jump (if_true_label
);
9785 if (drop_through_label
)
9786 emit_label (drop_through_label
);
9789 /* Generate code for a comparison of OP0 and OP1 with rtx code CODE.
9790 (including code to compute the values to be compared)
9791 and set (CC0) according to the result.
9792 The decision as to signed or unsigned comparison must be made by the caller.
9794 We force a stack adjustment unless there are currently
9795 things pushed on the stack that aren't yet used.
9797 If MODE is BLKmode, SIZE is an RTX giving the size of the objects being
9800 If ALIGN is non-zero, it is the alignment of this type; if zero, the
9801 size of MODE should be used. */
9804 compare_from_rtx (op0
, op1
, code
, unsignedp
, mode
, size
, align
)
9805 register rtx op0
, op1
;
9808 enum machine_mode mode
;
9814 /* If one operand is constant, make it the second one. Only do this
9815 if the other operand is not constant as well. */
9817 if ((CONSTANT_P (op0
) && ! CONSTANT_P (op1
))
9818 || (GET_CODE (op0
) == CONST_INT
&& GET_CODE (op1
) != CONST_INT
))
9823 code
= swap_condition (code
);
9828 op0
= force_not_mem (op0
);
9829 op1
= force_not_mem (op1
);
9832 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
9834 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == CONST_INT
&& GET_CODE (op1
) == CONST_INT
9835 && (tem
= simplify_relational_operation (code
, mode
, op0
, op1
)) != 0)
9839 /* There's no need to do this now that combine.c can eliminate lots of
9840 sign extensions. This can be less efficient in certain cases on other
9843 /* If this is a signed equality comparison, we can do it as an
9844 unsigned comparison since zero-extension is cheaper than sign
9845 extension and comparisons with zero are done as unsigned. This is
9846 the case even on machines that can do fast sign extension, since
9847 zero-extension is easier to combine with other operations than
9848 sign-extension is. If we are comparing against a constant, we must
9849 convert it to what it would look like unsigned. */
9850 if ((code
== EQ
|| code
== NE
) && ! unsignedp
9851 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0
)) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
9853 if (GET_CODE (op1
) == CONST_INT
9854 && (INTVAL (op1
) & GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (op0
))) != INTVAL (op1
))
9855 op1
= GEN_INT (INTVAL (op1
) & GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (op0
)));
9860 emit_cmp_insn (op0
, op1
, code
, size
, mode
, unsignedp
, align
);
9862 return gen_rtx_fmt_ee (code
, VOIDmode
, cc0_rtx
, const0_rtx
);
9865 /* Like do_compare_and_jump but expects the values to compare as two rtx's.
9866 The decision as to signed or unsigned comparison must be made by the caller.
9868 If MODE is BLKmode, SIZE is an RTX giving the size of the objects being
9871 If ALIGN is non-zero, it is the alignment of this type; if zero, the
9872 size of MODE should be used. */
9875 do_compare_rtx_and_jump (op0
, op1
, code
, unsignedp
, mode
, size
, align
,
9876 if_false_label
, if_true_label
)
9877 register rtx op0
, op1
;
9880 enum machine_mode mode
;
9883 rtx if_false_label
, if_true_label
;
9886 int dummy_true_label
= 0;
9888 /* Reverse the comparison if that is safe and we want to jump if it is
9890 if (! if_true_label
&& ! FLOAT_MODE_P (mode
))
9892 if_true_label
= if_false_label
;
9894 code
= reverse_condition (code
);
9897 /* If one operand is constant, make it the second one. Only do this
9898 if the other operand is not constant as well. */
9900 if ((CONSTANT_P (op0
) && ! CONSTANT_P (op1
))
9901 || (GET_CODE (op0
) == CONST_INT
&& GET_CODE (op1
) != CONST_INT
))
9906 code
= swap_condition (code
);
9911 op0
= force_not_mem (op0
);
9912 op1
= force_not_mem (op1
);
9915 do_pending_stack_adjust ();
9917 if (GET_CODE (op0
) == CONST_INT
&& GET_CODE (op1
) == CONST_INT
9918 && (tem
= simplify_relational_operation (code
, mode
, op0
, op1
)) != 0)
9920 if (tem
== const_true_rtx
)
9923 emit_jump (if_true_label
);
9928 emit_jump (if_false_label
);
9934 /* There's no need to do this now that combine.c can eliminate lots of
9935 sign extensions. This can be less efficient in certain cases on other
9938 /* If this is a signed equality comparison, we can do it as an
9939 unsigned comparison since zero-extension is cheaper than sign
9940 extension and comparisons with zero are done as unsigned. This is
9941 the case even on machines that can do fast sign extension, since
9942 zero-extension is easier to combine with other operations than
9943 sign-extension is. If we are comparing against a constant, we must
9944 convert it to what it would look like unsigned. */
9945 if ((code
== EQ
|| code
== NE
) && ! unsignedp
9946 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0
)) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
)
9948 if (GET_CODE (op1
) == CONST_INT
9949 && (INTVAL (op1
) & GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (op0
))) != INTVAL (op1
))
9950 op1
= GEN_INT (INTVAL (op1
) & GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (op0
)));
9955 if (! if_true_label
)
9957 dummy_true_label
= 1;
9958 if_true_label
= gen_label_rtx ();
9961 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (op0
, op1
, code
, size
, mode
, unsignedp
, align
,
9965 emit_jump (if_false_label
);
9966 if (dummy_true_label
)
9967 emit_label (if_true_label
);
9970 /* Generate code for a comparison expression EXP (including code to compute
9971 the values to be compared) and a conditional jump to IF_FALSE_LABEL and/or
9972 IF_TRUE_LABEL. One of the labels can be NULL_RTX, in which case the
9973 generated code will drop through.
9974 SIGNED_CODE should be the rtx operation for this comparison for
9975 signed data; UNSIGNED_CODE, likewise for use if data is unsigned.
9977 We force a stack adjustment unless there are currently
9978 things pushed on the stack that aren't yet used. */
9981 do_compare_and_jump (exp
, signed_code
, unsigned_code
, if_false_label
,
9984 enum rtx_code signed_code
, unsigned_code
;
9985 rtx if_false_label
, if_true_label
;
9987 unsigned int align0
, align1
;
9988 register rtx op0
, op1
;
9990 register enum machine_mode mode
;
9994 /* Don't crash if the comparison was erroneous. */
9995 op0
= expand_expr_unaligned (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0), &align0
);
9996 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)) == ERROR_MARK
)
9999 op1
= expand_expr_unaligned (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1), &align1
);
10000 type
= TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0));
10001 mode
= TYPE_MODE (type
);
10002 unsignedp
= TREE_UNSIGNED (type
);
10003 code
= unsignedp
? unsigned_code
: signed_code
;
10005 #ifdef HAVE_canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare
10006 /* If function pointers need to be "canonicalized" before they can
10007 be reliably compared, then canonicalize them. */
10008 if (HAVE_canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare
10009 && TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))) == POINTER_TYPE
10010 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))))
10013 rtx new_op0
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
10015 emit_insn (gen_canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare (new_op0
, op0
));
10019 if (HAVE_canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare
10020 && TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1))) == POINTER_TYPE
10021 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1))))
10024 rtx new_op1
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
10026 emit_insn (gen_canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare (new_op1
, op1
));
10031 /* Do any postincrements in the expression that was tested. */
10034 do_compare_rtx_and_jump (op0
, op1
, code
, unsignedp
, mode
,
10036 ? expr_size (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0)) : NULL_RTX
),
10037 MIN (align0
, align1
) / BITS_PER_UNIT
,
10038 if_false_label
, if_true_label
);
10041 /* Generate code to calculate EXP using a store-flag instruction
10042 and return an rtx for the result. EXP is either a comparison
10043 or a TRUTH_NOT_EXPR whose operand is a comparison.
10045 If TARGET is nonzero, store the result there if convenient.
10047 If ONLY_CHEAP is non-zero, only do this if it is likely to be very
10050 Return zero if there is no suitable set-flag instruction
10051 available on this machine.
10053 Once expand_expr has been called on the arguments of the comparison,
10054 we are committed to doing the store flag, since it is not safe to
10055 re-evaluate the expression. We emit the store-flag insn by calling
10056 emit_store_flag, but only expand the arguments if we have a reason
10057 to believe that emit_store_flag will be successful. If we think that
10058 it will, but it isn't, we have to simulate the store-flag with a
10059 set/jump/set sequence. */
10062 do_store_flag (exp
, target
, mode
, only_cheap
)
10065 enum machine_mode mode
;
10068 enum rtx_code code
;
10069 tree arg0
, arg1
, type
;
10071 enum machine_mode operand_mode
;
10075 enum insn_code icode
;
10076 rtx subtarget
= target
;
10079 /* If this is a TRUTH_NOT_EXPR, set a flag indicating we must invert the
10080 result at the end. We can't simply invert the test since it would
10081 have already been inverted if it were valid. This case occurs for
10082 some floating-point comparisons. */
10084 if (TREE_CODE (exp
) == TRUTH_NOT_EXPR
)
10085 invert
= 1, exp
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
10087 arg0
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0);
10088 arg1
= TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1);
10089 type
= TREE_TYPE (arg0
);
10090 operand_mode
= TYPE_MODE (type
);
10091 unsignedp
= TREE_UNSIGNED (type
);
10093 /* We won't bother with BLKmode store-flag operations because it would mean
10094 passing a lot of information to emit_store_flag. */
10095 if (operand_mode
== BLKmode
)
10098 /* We won't bother with store-flag operations involving function pointers
10099 when function pointers must be canonicalized before comparisons. */
10100 #ifdef HAVE_canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare
10101 if (HAVE_canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare
10102 && ((TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))) == POINTER_TYPE
10103 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 0))))
10105 || (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1))) == POINTER_TYPE
10106 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp
, 1))))
10107 == FUNCTION_TYPE
))))
10114 /* Get the rtx comparison code to use. We know that EXP is a comparison
10115 operation of some type. Some comparisons against 1 and -1 can be
10116 converted to comparisons with zero. Do so here so that the tests
10117 below will be aware that we have a comparison with zero. These
10118 tests will not catch constants in the first operand, but constants
10119 are rarely passed as the first operand. */
10121 switch (TREE_CODE (exp
))
10130 if (integer_onep (arg1
))
10131 arg1
= integer_zero_node
, code
= unsignedp
? LEU
: LE
;
10133 code
= unsignedp
? LTU
: LT
;
10136 if (! unsignedp
&& integer_all_onesp (arg1
))
10137 arg1
= integer_zero_node
, code
= LT
;
10139 code
= unsignedp
? LEU
: LE
;
10142 if (! unsignedp
&& integer_all_onesp (arg1
))
10143 arg1
= integer_zero_node
, code
= GE
;
10145 code
= unsignedp
? GTU
: GT
;
10148 if (integer_onep (arg1
))
10149 arg1
= integer_zero_node
, code
= unsignedp
? GTU
: GT
;
10151 code
= unsignedp
? GEU
: GE
;
10154 case UNORDERED_EXPR
:
10180 /* Put a constant second. */
10181 if (TREE_CODE (arg0
) == REAL_CST
|| TREE_CODE (arg0
) == INTEGER_CST
)
10183 tem
= arg0
; arg0
= arg1
; arg1
= tem
;
10184 code
= swap_condition (code
);
10187 /* If this is an equality or inequality test of a single bit, we can
10188 do this by shifting the bit being tested to the low-order bit and
10189 masking the result with the constant 1. If the condition was EQ,
10190 we xor it with 1. This does not require an scc insn and is faster
10191 than an scc insn even if we have it. */
10193 if ((code
== NE
|| code
== EQ
)
10194 && TREE_CODE (arg0
) == BIT_AND_EXPR
&& integer_zerop (arg1
)
10195 && integer_pow2p (TREE_OPERAND (arg0
, 1)))
10197 tree inner
= TREE_OPERAND (arg0
, 0);
10198 int bitnum
= tree_log2 (TREE_OPERAND (arg0
, 1));
10201 /* If INNER is a right shift of a constant and it plus BITNUM does
10202 not overflow, adjust BITNUM and INNER. */
10204 if (TREE_CODE (inner
) == RSHIFT_EXPR
10205 && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (inner
, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
10206 && TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (TREE_OPERAND (inner
, 1)) == 0
10207 && (bitnum
+ TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (inner
, 1))
10208 < TYPE_PRECISION (type
)))
10210 bitnum
+= TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (inner
, 1));
10211 inner
= TREE_OPERAND (inner
, 0);
10214 /* If we are going to be able to omit the AND below, we must do our
10215 operations as unsigned. If we must use the AND, we have a choice.
10216 Normally unsigned is faster, but for some machines signed is. */
10217 ops_unsignedp
= (bitnum
== TYPE_PRECISION (type
) - 1 ? 1
10218 #ifdef LOAD_EXTEND_OP
10219 : (LOAD_EXTEND_OP (operand_mode
) == SIGN_EXTEND
? 0 : 1)
10225 if (subtarget
== 0 || GET_CODE (subtarget
) != REG
10226 || GET_MODE (subtarget
) != operand_mode
10227 || ! safe_from_p (subtarget
, inner
, 1))
10230 op0
= expand_expr (inner
, subtarget
, VOIDmode
, 0);
10233 op0
= expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR
, GET_MODE (op0
), op0
,
10234 size_int (bitnum
), subtarget
, ops_unsignedp
);
10236 if (GET_MODE (op0
) != mode
)
10237 op0
= convert_to_mode (mode
, op0
, ops_unsignedp
);
10239 if ((code
== EQ
&& ! invert
) || (code
== NE
&& invert
))
10240 op0
= expand_binop (mode
, xor_optab
, op0
, const1_rtx
, subtarget
,
10241 ops_unsignedp
, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
10243 /* Put the AND last so it can combine with more things. */
10244 if (bitnum
!= TYPE_PRECISION (type
) - 1)
10245 op0
= expand_and (op0
, const1_rtx
, subtarget
);
10250 /* Now see if we are likely to be able to do this. Return if not. */
10251 if (! can_compare_p (code
, operand_mode
, ccp_store_flag
))
10254 icode
= setcc_gen_code
[(int) code
];
10255 if (icode
== CODE_FOR_nothing
10256 || (only_cheap
&& insn_data
[(int) icode
].operand
[0].mode
!= mode
))
10258 /* We can only do this if it is one of the special cases that
10259 can be handled without an scc insn. */
10260 if ((code
== LT
&& integer_zerop (arg1
))
10261 || (! only_cheap
&& code
== GE
&& integer_zerop (arg1
)))
10263 else if (BRANCH_COST
>= 0
10264 && ! only_cheap
&& (code
== NE
|| code
== EQ
)
10265 && TREE_CODE (type
) != REAL_TYPE
10266 && ((abs_optab
->handlers
[(int) operand_mode
].insn_code
10267 != CODE_FOR_nothing
)
10268 || (ffs_optab
->handlers
[(int) operand_mode
].insn_code
10269 != CODE_FOR_nothing
)))
10275 preexpand_calls (exp
);
10276 if (subtarget
== 0 || GET_CODE (subtarget
) != REG
10277 || GET_MODE (subtarget
) != operand_mode
10278 || ! safe_from_p (subtarget
, arg1
, 1))
10281 op0
= expand_expr (arg0
, subtarget
, VOIDmode
, 0);
10282 op1
= expand_expr (arg1
, NULL_RTX
, VOIDmode
, 0);
10285 target
= gen_reg_rtx (mode
);
10287 /* Pass copies of OP0 and OP1 in case they contain a QUEUED. This is safe
10288 because, if the emit_store_flag does anything it will succeed and
10289 OP0 and OP1 will not be used subsequently. */
10291 result
= emit_store_flag (target
, code
,
10292 queued_subexp_p (op0
) ? copy_rtx (op0
) : op0
,
10293 queued_subexp_p (op1
) ? copy_rtx (op1
) : op1
,
10294 operand_mode
, unsignedp
, 1);
10299 result
= expand_binop (mode
, xor_optab
, result
, const1_rtx
,
10300 result
, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN
);
10304 /* If this failed, we have to do this with set/compare/jump/set code. */
10305 if (GET_CODE (target
) != REG
10306 || reg_mentioned_p (target
, op0
) || reg_mentioned_p (target
, op1
))
10307 target
= gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (target
));
10309 emit_move_insn (target
, invert
? const0_rtx
: const1_rtx
);
10310 result
= compare_from_rtx (op0
, op1
, code
, unsignedp
,
10311 operand_mode
, NULL_RTX
, 0);
10312 if (GET_CODE (result
) == CONST_INT
)
10313 return (((result
== const0_rtx
&& ! invert
)
10314 || (result
!= const0_rtx
&& invert
))
10315 ? const0_rtx
: const1_rtx
);
10317 label
= gen_label_rtx ();
10318 if (bcc_gen_fctn
[(int) code
] == 0)
10321 emit_jump_insn ((*bcc_gen_fctn
[(int) code
]) (label
));
10322 emit_move_insn (target
, invert
? const1_rtx
: const0_rtx
);
10323 emit_label (label
);
10328 /* Generate a tablejump instruction (used for switch statements). */
10330 #ifdef HAVE_tablejump
10332 /* INDEX is the value being switched on, with the lowest value
10333 in the table already subtracted.
10334 MODE is its expected mode (needed if INDEX is constant).
10335 RANGE is the length of the jump table.
10336 TABLE_LABEL is a CODE_LABEL rtx for the table itself.
10338 DEFAULT_LABEL is a CODE_LABEL rtx to jump to if the
10339 index value is out of range. */
10342 do_tablejump (index
, mode
, range
, table_label
, default_label
)
10343 rtx index
, range
, table_label
, default_label
;
10344 enum machine_mode mode
;
10346 register rtx temp
, vector
;
10348 /* Do an unsigned comparison (in the proper mode) between the index
10349 expression and the value which represents the length of the range.
10350 Since we just finished subtracting the lower bound of the range
10351 from the index expression, this comparison allows us to simultaneously
10352 check that the original index expression value is both greater than
10353 or equal to the minimum value of the range and less than or equal to
10354 the maximum value of the range. */
10356 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (index
, range
, GTU
, NULL_RTX
, mode
, 1,
10359 /* If index is in range, it must fit in Pmode.
10360 Convert to Pmode so we can index with it. */
10362 index
= convert_to_mode (Pmode
, index
, 1);
10364 /* Don't let a MEM slip thru, because then INDEX that comes
10365 out of PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS won't be a valid address,
10366 and break_out_memory_refs will go to work on it and mess it up. */
10367 #ifdef PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS
10368 if (flag_pic
&& GET_CODE (index
) != REG
)
10369 index
= copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode
, index
);
10372 /* If flag_force_addr were to affect this address
10373 it could interfere with the tricky assumptions made
10374 about addresses that contain label-refs,
10375 which may be valid only very near the tablejump itself. */
10376 /* ??? The only correct use of CASE_VECTOR_MODE is the one inside the
10377 GET_MODE_SIZE, because this indicates how large insns are. The other
10378 uses should all be Pmode, because they are addresses. This code
10379 could fail if addresses and insns are not the same size. */
10380 index
= gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode
,
10381 gen_rtx_MULT (Pmode
, index
,
10382 GEN_INT (GET_MODE_SIZE (CASE_VECTOR_MODE
))),
10383 gen_rtx_LABEL_REF (Pmode
, table_label
));
10384 #ifdef PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS
10386 index
= PIC_CASE_VECTOR_ADDRESS (index
);
10389 index
= memory_address_noforce (CASE_VECTOR_MODE
, index
);
10390 temp
= gen_reg_rtx (CASE_VECTOR_MODE
);
10391 vector
= gen_rtx_MEM (CASE_VECTOR_MODE
, index
);
10392 RTX_UNCHANGING_P (vector
) = 1;
10393 convert_move (temp
, vector
, 0);
10395 emit_jump_insn (gen_tablejump (temp
, table_label
));
10397 /* If we are generating PIC code or if the table is PC-relative, the
10398 table and JUMP_INSN must be adjacent, so don't output a BARRIER. */
10399 if (! CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
&& ! flag_pic
)
10403 #endif /* HAVE_tablejump */